Advanced Controller

Operations Manual
i-iii
Notices
Scope of this Manual This document describes the features and operation of the Advanced
Controller.
Limitations This document is copyright and is provided solely for the use of the
purchaser. It is not to be copied in any way, nor its contents divulged to any
third party, nor to be used as the basis of a tender or specification without
the express written permission of the manufacturer.
Disclaimer The advisory procedures and information contained within this Operations
Manual have been compiled as a guide to the safe and effective operation
of products supplied by Nu-Lec Industries Pty Ltd.
It has been prepared in conjunction with references from sub-assembly
suppliers and the collective experience of the manufacturer.
In-service conditions for use of the products may vary between customers
and end-users. Consequently, this Operations Manual is offered as a guide
only. It should be used in conjunction with the customers own safety
procedures, maintenance program, engineering judgement and training
qualifications.
No responsibility, either direct or consequential, for injury or equipment
failure can be accepted by Nu-Lec Industries Pty Ltd resulting from the use
of this Technical Manual.
Copyright 2005 by Nu-Lec Industries Pty Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this document may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written
permission of the manufacturer.
Operations Manual
i-iv
Table of Contents
i-v
CONTENTS
1 Introduction..................................................... 1-1
Abbreviations ................................................................ 1-2
Symbols ........................................................................ 1-2
2 Scope of this Operations Manual .................. 2-1
General ......................................................................... 2-1
Controller Versions Covered by this Manual................. 2-1
Software Identification System...................................... 2-1
Software Version Covered by this Manual .................... 2-1
Product Documentation................................................. 2-2
3 Ratings and Specifications............................ 3-1
Duty Cycle..................................................................... 3-1
Current Transformers.................................................... 3-1
General Specifications .................................................. 3-1
Power System measurements .................................... 3-2
SF
6
Gas Pressure Measurement.................................. 3-3
4 Control Electronics Operation....................... 4-1
Sealing & Condensation................................................ 4-1
Auxiliary Power Source................................................. 4-1
Controller....................................................................... 4-1
PSU Module................................................................ 4-1
CAPE Module.............................................................. 4-1
Operator Interface/ Door Assembly............................... 4-2
WSOS5 Interface ........................................................ 4-3
Customer Compartment................................................ 4-3
5 Operator Control Panel ................................. 5-1
Description .................................................................... 5-1
Display Groups.............................................................. 5-2
Page Layout .................................................................. 5-3
Changing Settings........................................................ 5-3
Operator Settings........................................................ 5-3
Password Protected Settings...................................... 5-3
Protection Settings...................................................... 5-4
Navigating Within Display Groups................................. 5-4
Page Layout .................................................................. 5-4
Quick Keys.................................................................... 5-4
Quick Key Configuration ............................................. 5-4
Using a Quick Key....................................................... 5-5
6 Event Log......................................................... 6-1
Introduction ................................................................... 6-1
Reading the Event Log.................................................. 6-1
Typical Event Log Trip Sequence Display .................... 6-2
Setting Change Events ................................................. 6-2
Dual Events................................................................... 6-3
Event Filtering ............................................................... 6-4
7 Work Tags and Controller Mode.................... 7-1
Definition of Local or Remote User ............................... 7-1
Local/Remote/Hit and Run Mode.................................. 7-1
Local Mode.................................................................. 7-1
Remote Mode.............................................................. 7-1
Hit and Run ................................................................. 7-2
Work Tagging................................................................ 7-3
Work Tag Mode Protection Settings ............................. 7-3
8 Protection Features ...................................... 8-1
Introduction ................................................................... 8-1
Protection Settings........................................................ 8-1
Protection Groups ......................................................... 8-2
Basic Protection Operation ........................................... 8-2
OC Protection Element Pickup and Reset .................. 8-2
OC Protection Element Time / Current Characteristics8-3
Instantaneous (INST) .................................................. 8-3
Definite Time (DT)....................................................... 8-3
Inverse Current/Time (IDMT) ...................................... 8-3
Time Current Characteristic Modifiers .........................8-3
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) .........................................8-5
Live Load Blocking.......................................................8-5
Cold Load Pickup (CLP) ................................................8-5
Cold Load Pickup Example..........................................8-7
Cold Load Pickup Status Display.................................8-7
Operator Control of Cold Load Pickup.........................8-7
Automatic Protection Group Selection...........................8-8
Enabling Automatic Selection ......................................8-8
Disabling Automatic Selection .....................................8-8
Selection Rules ............................................................8-8
Protection Elements.......................................................8-9
Current Operated Protection Elements........................8-10
Phase Overcurrent (OC) Elements ............................8-10
Earth Fault (EF) Elements .........................................8-11
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) Elements .......................8-11
Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Elements..............8-12
Directional Overcurrent Protection...............................8-12
Directional Protection...................................................8-13
Determining Direction ................................................8-13
Protection Groups ......................................................8-13
Directional Protection Operation................................8-13
Trips to Lockout .........................................................8-16
Sequence Reset ........................................................8-17
Auto Reclose..............................................................8-17
Auto Restore..............................................................8-17
VZPS Balancing.........................................................8-18
Directional Blocking .....................................................8-18
Characteristic Angle...................................................8-19
Phase Directional Blocking ........................................8-19
Earth/SEF Directional Blocking..................................8-20
SEF Zero SequenceVoltage Alarm............................8-20
Event Record .............................................................8-20
Configuration pages...................................................8-21
Parameters to be Configured.....................................8-22
Turning Directional Blocking On/Off...........................8-23
Voltage Operated Protection Elements........................8-23
Under and Over Frequency Protection Elements ........8-23
Frequency Measurement ...........................................8-23
Under/Over Frequency Tripping ................................8-24
Normal Frequency Close ...........................................8-24
Configuration..............................................................8-25
Fail to Operate Under Protection .................................8-27
Setting Overcurrent Protection Elements.....................8-27
Setting OC Protection Elements using WSOS5.........8-27
Auto Reclosing.............................................................8-28
Sequence Control ......................................................8-29
Sequence Reset ........................................................8-29
Lockout ......................................................................8-29
Dead Lockout .............................................................8-29
Live Load Blocking.....................................................8-29
Single Shot Tripping...................................................8-29
Work Tag Tripping .....................................................8-30
Trip Flags.....................................................................8-31
Trip Flag Display Page...............................................8-31
Resetting theTrip Flags..............................................8-31
Inrush Restraint............................................................8-32
ANSI Device Numbers.................................................8-32
9 Power System Measurement ......................... 9-1
Introduction ....................................................................9-1
Navigation......................................................................9-1
Daily, Weekly, Monthly Demand....................................9-1
Configurable History ......................................................9-2
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
i-vi
10 Communications........................................... 10-1
Communication Interface.............................................10-1
Introduction................................................................10-1
Enabling/Disabling Communication Ports..................10-1
Port Details ................................................................10-1
ADVC Control Cubicle External Port .........................10-3
Communication Display Group Navigation ................10-3
Configuring RS-232 Port Settings................................10-4
RS-232 Configuration Settings ..................................10-4
RS232 Transmission of a data packet .......................10-5
RDI Modem Support ..................................................10-5
Configuring RS-485 Port Settings................................10-6
Configuring V23 FSK Port Settings .............................10-6
Configuring 10Base-T Port Settings ............................10-6
Communications Diagnostic Feature...........................10-7
Communication Trace................................................10-7
11 Power Quality Measurement ........................ 11-1
Power Quality Tool Kit .................................................11-1
Supply Outage Monitoring ...........................................11-1
Introduction................................................................11-1
Determination of Supply Outage................................11-1
Configuration .............................................................11-2
Harmonic Analysis.......................................................11-2
Determination of Harmonics Alarms ..........................11-3
Logging of Harmonics Alarms....................................11-3
Historical Data Logging of Harmonics .......................11-3
Waveform Capture.......................................................11-4
Configuration .............................................................11-4
Waveform Replay ......................................................11-5
12 Automation.................................................... 12-1
Introduction..................................................................12-1
Example LA Scheme ...................................................12-1
Fault Isolation and Network Re-Configuration ...........12-1
Auto-Restoration Option ............................................12-2
13 Windows Switchgear Operating System
(WSOS5)..................................................... 13-1
Introduction..................................................................13-1
OCP vs WSOS5 ..........................................................13-2
OCP and not WSOS5................................................13-2
WSOS5 and not OCP................................................13-2
WSOS5 features that are not controller features.......13-2
14 ADVC Customisation.................................... 14-1
Introduction..................................................................14-1
Feature Selection.........................................................14-1
Protection...................................................................14-2
Automation.................................................................14-2
General ......................................................................14-3
Communications ........................................................14-3
Power Quality ............................................................14-3
ADVC OCP Display Menus .........................................14-4
Plant Name................................................................14-4
Menu Types.................................................................14-5
Standard Menu ............................................................14-5
System Status Display Group....................................14-5
Event Log Display Group...........................................14-5
Measurement Display Group.....................................14-6
Protection Display Group...........................................14-6
Automation Display Group.........................................14-6
Communication Display Group ..................................14-6
First Screen Selection................................................14-6
Locale Related System Settings................................14-6
Configurable Quick Keys ...........................................14-7
Custom Menu ..............................................................14-7
Rotating Custom Menu..............................................14-8
Custom/Standard Menu Navigation...........................14-8
15 Accessories................................................... 15-1
Input Output Expander Card (IOEX2).......................... 15-1
I/O Field Excitation..................................................... 15-1
IOEX2 Installation...................................................... 15-2
IOEX Status Page...................................................... 15-3
Inputs - Standard Mapping ........................................ 15-3
Outputs - Standard Mapping...................................... 15-4
System Healthy Indicator........................................... 15-5
Power Consumption .................................................. 15-5
Configuring the IOEX................................................. 15-5
Test and Training Set .................................................. 15-6
Appendix A ACR Models.............................. A-1
N-Series Recloser ................................................A-1
U-Series Recloser ................................................A-2
Other Reclosers ...................................................A-3
Recloser overview and operation.........................A-4
Appendix B Dimensions............................... B-1
ADVC...................................................................B-1
Customer Equipment Space................................B-2
Appendix C Replaceable Parts & Tools...... C-1
Appendix D ADVC Schematics.................... D-1
Appendix E IEC255 Inv Time Prot Tables... E-1
Appendix F IEEE Inv Time Prot Tables....... F-1
Appendix G Non-Std Inv Time Prot Curves G-1
Appendix H Communication Settings......... H-1
RS232 Communication Port Settings ..................H-1
RDI Modem Support Settings ..............................H-3
RS485 Communication Port Settings. .................H-3
V23 FSK Port Settings .........................................H-4
10Base-T Port Settings........................................H-5
Communications Trace Settings ..........................H-6
Appendix I System Status Pages ..................I-1
Trip Flags .............................................................. I-2
Pickup Flags ......................................................... I-2
Operator Settings 1 ........................................................ I-2
Operator settings 2 ............................................... I-3
System settings 1.................................................. I-3
System settings 2.................................................. I-3
Switchgear Status ................................................. I-3
BushingLive/Dead Indication ................................ I-4
Phase Voltage and Power Flow............................ I-4
Terminal Designation/Rotation.............................. I-4
Radio..................................................................... I-4
Switchgear Type and Ratings ............................... I-5
Switchgear Wear/General Details .................................. I-5
Options 1............................................................... I-5
Options 2............................................................... I-5
Options 3............................................................... I-5
Options 4............................................................... I-6
Options 5............................................................... I-6
Quick Key Map selection................................................ I-6
IOEX Status .......................................................... I-6
Hit and Run..................................................................... I-6
Waveform Capture ......................................................... I-7
Waveform Trigger........................................................... I-7
Battery Health Test ......................................................... I-7
Appendix J Measurement Pages..................J-1
System Measurements ........................................ J-1
Current ................................................................. J-1
Voltage................................................................. J-1
Sequence Voltage................................................ J-1
Power................................................................... J-2
Source Side Voltages .......................................... J-2
Table of Contents
i-vii
CONTENTS
Load Side Voltages...............................................J-2
Supply Outages ....................................................J-2
Monthly Maximum Demand..................................J-2
Weekly Maximum Demand...................................J-3
Maximum Demand Indicator.................................J-3
Appendix K Protection Pages...................... K-1
Protection Setting 1 (A-J)..................................... K-1
Protection Setting 2 (A-J)..................................... K-1
Protection Setting 3 (A-J)..................................... K-1
Protection Setting 4 (A-J)..................................... K-2
Protection Setting 5 (A-J)..................................... K-2
Directional Blocking 1 .......................................... K-2
Directional Blocking 2 .......................................... K-2
Directional Blocking 3 .......................................... K-3
Under/Over Frequency Protection 1.................... K-4
Under/Over Frequency Protection 2.................... K-5
Phase Protection Trip .......................................... K-5
Phase Single Shot Protection Trip....................... K-5
Phase Work Tag Protection Trip.......................... K-6
Earth Protection Trip............................................ K-6
Earth Single Shot Protection Trip ........................ K-6
Earth Work Tag Protection Trip ........................... K-7
NPS Protection Trip............................................. K-7
NPS Single Shot Protection Trip.......................... K-7
NPS Work Tag Protection Trip ............................ K-8
Appendix L Automation Pages.....................L-1
Loop Automation Status ...................................... L-1
Loop Automation Configuration ........................... L-1
Appendix M List of Events...........................M-1
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
i-ix
Introduction
1-1
1 Introduction
This manual details the operation of the Advanced Controller (ADVC).
The ADVC is designed to operate an automatic circuit recloser (ACR).
The advanced controller (ADVC) which reads and displays the
information stored in its attached ACR, trips and closes the ACR for the
primary purpose of protection. The ADVC
consists of:
an operator interface mounted in the door
an electronic switchgear controller that monitors the ACR and
provides protection functions
a power supply which also supplies power for customer equipment
an accessories and customer equipment compartment
is powered by an auxiliary voltage supply of 110, 220, or 240 volts
AC
is connected to the ACR via a detachable control cable.
The ADVC cubicle is constructed of 316 stainless steel and is insulated
and designed to minimise any temperature rise resulting from solar
heating.
Access to the Operator Control Panel is provided via a lockable hatch in
the cubicle door. Both the hatch cover and cubicle door are sealed with
a rubber extrusion and the cubicle vents are screened against the entry
of vermin.
The ADVC electronics incorporate the functions of:
an overcurrent and earth/ground fault protection relay,
an auto reclose relay, and
a remote terminal unit.
Additionally, the electronics measure line current, voltage, real and
reactive power, fault currents, and harmonics and waveform capture
and this data is stored for transmission or off-line analysis.
The ADVC contains a built-in microprocessor controlled power supply
which provides uninterrupted operation of not only the ACR and
protection relay, but also the communications radio or modem.
The ADVC reads and displays switchgear-related information. Details
such as switchgear calibration, wear and operation allow the ADVC to
be shifted to other switchgear types while maintaining critical
information on the condition of the switchgear.
The ADVC customer compartment provides ample room for equipment.
Standard communications cables can be used for connection to the
communications ports on the ADVC and power is readily accessible
from the power terminal block.
ADVC Applicable ACR
ADVC Base Model
Nu-Lec N-Series
1
Merlin Gerin N-Series
1. Later usage in this publication of N-Series ACR refers to both the Nu-Lec
N-Series ACR and the Merlin Gerin N-Series ACR.
ADVC Base Model
Nu-Lec U-Series
2
Merlin Gerin U-Series
2. Later usage in this publication of U-Series ACR refers to both the Nu-Lec
U-Series ACR and the Merlin Gerin U-Series ACR.
ADVC V-Series
ADVC C-Series
Supports Cooper three-phase reclosers that have 24 Vdc
trip/close circuits, in retrofit situations to replace Kyle Form
3, 3A, 4, 4A, 4C, and TypeFXA and FXB controls. Further
details are provided in Appendix A (page A-1).
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
1-2
Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in this document:
Symbols The bushing symbol indicates that the adjacent information
applies only to the specified ACR.
The grey box symbol indicates that the adjacent information
does not apply to all products.
The navigation symbol indicates that the adjacent text
contains operator panel display navigation information.
The note symbol indicates that the adjacent text contains
information for your particular attention.
The warning symbol indicates that the adjacent text contains
a warning.
The caution symbol indicates that the adjacent text details a
situation in which care should be taken.
ACO Auto Changeover OC Phase Overcurrent
ACR Automatic Circuit Recloser OCP Operator Control Panel
ADVC Advanced controller OF Over Frequency Protection
BDU Basic Display Unit OV Over Voltage Protection
CAPE Control and protection
enclosure
PRTN Protection
CTRL Controller PSU Power supply unit
DT Definite Time PTCL Prorocol
EF Earth (Ground) Fault SEF Sensitive Earth (Sensitive
Ground) Fault
IDMT IInverse Definite Minimum TimeSWGR Switchgear
INST Instantaneous UF Under Frequency Protection
LA Loop Automation UV Under Voltage Protection
LOP Loss of Phase Protection VIB Voltage Imbalance
NPS Negative Phase Sequence WSOS5Windows Switchgear Operating
System
NWRK Network

Scope of this Operations Manual

2-1
2 Scope of this Operations Manual
General This manual describes the operation of the Advanced Controller.
Whilst every care has been taken in preparation of this manual, no
responsibility is taken for loss or damage incurred by the purchaser or
user due to any error or omission in the document.
Inevitably, not all details of equipment are provided nor are instructions
for every variation or contingency during installation, operation or
maintenance.
For additional information on specific problems or requirements, please
contact the manufacturer or your distributor.
Controller Versions Covered by
this Manual
This manual applies to the following controller versions:

Software Identification System The software loaded into the ADVC is identified by its version which has
the form:
AXX-XX.XX.
This precisely identifies the software loaded into the program memory
on the controller.
In order to obtain effective technical support from the manufacturer or your
distributor it is vital to record the software version and to quote these when
making your inquiry. Without this information it is impossible for our
customer service department to identify the software and provide correct
support.
The software version is shown on the Operator Control Panel page
Switchgear Wear/General Details:
See Operator Control Panel on page 5-1. to find out how to access this
page.
Software Version Covered by this
Manual
The software version and configuration determine the functionality of
the controller. This manual applies to Software Version 41.
Advanced Controller, ADVC - Standard Control Cubicle
Advanced Controller, ADVC - C-Series Control Cubicle
Advanced Controller, ADVC - V-Series Control Cubicle
Advanced Controller, ADVC - Standard Control Cubicle (Extended Temp)
Advanced Controller, ADVC - C-Series Control Cubicle (Extended Temp)
Advanced Controller, ADVC - V-Series Control Cubicle (Extended Temp)
- - - - - Switchgear Wear/General Details - - - - S
U Contact 100.0% Cubicle S/N 1234
V Contact 100.0% App.Ver A41-01.01
W Contact 100.0%
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
2-2
Product Documentation The CD which contains this manual also contains the additional
manuals:
DNP3 Manual - Contains information on the telemetry protocol for
communication with remote control systems.
Loop Automation Manual
An Installation and Maintenance manual is provided for the ADVC in
combination with each of the manufacturers ACRs, for the ADVC V-
Series, and for the C-Series retrofit models.
A Service Procedures Manual describes how to perform the customer
test procedures and how to remove and replace ADVC modules. The
Service Procedures Manual is available from your local distributor or
the manufacturers Service Department.
Ratings and Specifications
3-1
3 Ratings and Specifications
Duty Cycle Maximum allowable duty cycle at full short current rating:
Open-0.5s-Close.
Open-2s-Close.
Open-2s-Close.
Open followed by 300 second recovery time.
Current Transformers There is no access to current transformer connections on the
equipment. This data is supplied for information only.
Note that this data is relevant to the base model only.
General Specifications
Ratio 2000:1
Accuracy 10 Amp - 800 Amp 0.5%
Accuracy 800 Amp - 12500 Amp 2.5%
Cubicle material 316 stainless steel
Cubicle shell sealing IP 44
Electronic enclosure sealing IP 65
Wind loading resistance of structure >160km/hr
Wind loading on door when latched in open position >60km/hr
Angle of hatch opening 135
Angle of door opening 180
Operating temperature range -10C to 50C
Extended operating temperature range (optional battery
heater required)
-40C to 50C
Maximum radiation
1.1kW/m
2
Humidity 0 to 100%
Standard control cable length
a
7m (23)
Maximum vertical separation from Nu-Lec
ACRs with standard (7m) control cable.
5m (16.4)
Maintenance interval
b 5 years
Auxiliary supply voltage (LV AC mains supply) As Ordered
+10 -20%
Required auxiliary supply rating 100 VA
Battery (With the 12Ah battery option, the battery heater
is standard.)
2 x 12V 7.2Ah
Battery hold up time from fully charged at 25C 38 hours with 7Ah
52 hours with 12Ah
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
3-2
Power System measurements
HV line measurements on all three phases are made as follows
Capacity available for communications, hold up time (no
heater, OCI or IOEX) 13.8V TX:2.1A, 15min/hr,
RX 320mA
20 hours
Battery recharge time (new battery to 80% nominal
capacity)
10 hours
Battery replacement interval
b.
5 years
Battery Low Voltage
c
23V
Battery High Voltage
c.
32V
Earthing 10mm earth stud
Battery heater power (where fitted) 10W
Battery heater element life
30,000hrs
d
Radio/Modem
A radio or modem may be fitted by the manufacturer or by the utility, for remote
communications. Space, power and data interfaces are provided within the
control cubicle.
Radio/Modem Power Supply Voltage (set by user) 5 - 15V DC
Radio/Modem Power Supply Continuous Current
e
3A
Radio/Modem Power Supply Max Current 8A for 30 sec with
10% duty cycle
Radio/Modem Space on Radio Panel 300 x 250 x 150mm
Radio/Modem Interface V23, RS232, RS485
Radio/Modem Power Shutdown Time 1 - 1440 mins
Shutdown time increment 10 secs
Control Electronics
Continuous secondary current 0.8A
Short time secondary current 12A for 3s
Short time current recovery time 60 sec
Required auxiliary supply rating 100VA
a. Other control cable lengths available-4, 11 and 20 metres.
b. Battery replacement interval is influenced by environmental temperature.
c. Temperature compensated at 48mV/C.
d. If the heater is required for 6 months at say an average of 10 hours per day, it would
be required for appoximately 2,000 hours running time per year, thus giving 15 years
life.
e. For an 11kV/27.8V transformer using the integrated supply, the maximum
continuous current drawn from the radio supply should be limited to 0.5 amps.
Voltage Range (RMS Phase/Earth) N15/N27/
U27
2 - 15kV
Voltage Range (RMS Phase/Earth) N38 2 - 25kV
Voltage Resolution 1V
Voltage Accuracy
a
2.5% 25V
Live Terminal Threshold Voltage range
b
2 - 15kV
Live Terminal Threshold Voltage setting resolution
b.
1V
Ratings and Specifications
3-3
SF
6
Gas Pressure Measurement Gas pressure measurement is only available from an ADVC
controlling an N-Series ACR where SF
6
is the switch
insulating medium.
Live Terminal Threshold Voltage accuracy
a.b.
5% 250V
Live Terminal Threshold Hysteresis -20%
Phase Current Range (True RMS) 2.5 - 800 Amp
Earth Current Range (True RMS) 1 - 800 Amp
Current Resolution 1 Amp
Phase Current Accuracy
a.
1.0% 1 Amp over
range 10 - 800 Amp
Earth Current Accuracy
a.
1.0% 1 Amp over
range 1 - 800 Amp
Apparent Power Range 0 - 54 MVA: N-Series
0 - 36 MVA: U-Series
Apparent Power Resolution 1 kVA
Apparent Power Accuracy
a.
3% over range
20 - 800 Amp
Real Power Range
c

d
-54 - +54 MW:
N-Series
-36 - +36 MW:
U-Series
Real Power Accuracy
a.c.d.
3% at PF > 0.9
Real Power Resolution 1 kW
Reactive Power Range
c.
0 - 54 MVAR:
N-Series
0 - 36 MVAR:
U-Series
Reactive Power Resolution 1 kVAR
Reactive Power Accuracy
a.
4% at PF < 0.5
Unsigned Power Factor 0.5 - 1.0
Power Factor Resolution 0.01
Power Factor Accuracy 0.05
Measurement Filter Time Constant (Step Response) 2 sec
Measurement Update Rate 0.5 sec
a. Includes accuracy of switchgear current and voltage transformers.
b. Used for Live/Dead display, Live Load Blocking and Loss Of Supply detection.
c. In database for transmission by a protocol.
d. Used to accumulate kWh reading for weekly maximum demand data.
Nominal Pressure at 20C
35 kPa Gauge
Gas Pressure Display Resolution 1 kPa
Gas Pressure Display Accuracy 5 kPa
Gas Low Alarm Setting 15 kPa Gauge @
20C
Gas Low Alarm Accuracy 5 kPa
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
3-4
Control Electronics Operation
4-1
4 Control Electronics Operation
The ADVC is designed for outdoor pole mounted operation. The cubicle
is vented and insulated to minimise internal temperature variation and
maximise battery life.
The cubicle dimensions are given in Appendix B (page B-1).
Sealing & Condensation All cubicle vents are screened against vermin entry and the cubicle door
is sealed with replaceable foam tape.
Complete sealing against water entry under all conditions is not
expected e.g. during operation in the rain. Instead, the design is such
that if any water does enter, it will run out of the bottom without affecting
the electrical or electronic parts. The extensive use of stainless steel
and other corrosion proof materials ensures that the presence of
moisture has no detrimental effects.
Condensation can be expected to form under some atmospheric
conditions such as tropical storms. However, condensation will be on
metal surfaces where it is of no consequence. The water runs out in the
same way as any other water entering the cubicle. Condensation will
run out of the bottom or be dried by ventilation and self heating.
All electronic modules are fully sealed and are self heating.
Auxiliary Power Source The auxiliary supply is used to maintain charge on the sealed lead-acid
batteries that provide stand-by power when auxiliary power is lost. The
controller monitors the status of both the auxiliary and battery supplies.
A low power mode is activated when the batteries are nearly exhausted
due to loss of the auxiliary supply. This mode minimises power
consumption while still maintaining basic functionality.
Controller The controller consists of three modules. See Figure 1 (page 4-4):
Power supply unit (PSU)
Control and protection enclosure (CAPE)
Basic Display Unit (BDU).
The ADVC block diagram is given in Figure 2 (page 4-5).
PSU Module
The PSU module supplies power to the CAPE, and to the customer
compartment. The PSU module:
connects to the batteries
controls the supply from external auxiliary sources
filters these supplies and manages the battery power level.
It also performs battery testing and has a real time clock. A general
purpose power outlet is available as an optional extra (country
customizable). The incoming power is protected and isolated by a
circuit breaker. The supply from the batteries is protected and controlled
by a circuit breaker.
The electronic components are contained inside a housing that
provides environmental protection, sealing and EMC shielding. The
power outlet, circuit breakers and switches are easily accessible when
the ADVC door is opened. The batteries are located and retained on the
exterior top of the PSU module.
CAPE Module
The main module of control electronics is the Control and Protection
Enclosure (CAPE).
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
4-2
The CAPE digitises the current transformer (CT) signals and voltage
screen (CVT) signals from the recloser. These are used to provide a
variety of data for the operator.
The CAPE module contains the PCOM board and the SWGM board,
assembled into a housing that provides protection from the
environment, sealing and EMC shielding.
The CAPE performs the following functions:
Driving the Basic Display Unit (BDU).
Driving the external communications interface to allow monitoring
and control from a remote computer or operator over a
communications link.
Switchgear Monitoring and Control
Driving WSOS5 over an RS232 link. The port for this link is labelled
Maintenance Port and is located under the hatch, on the front of
the BDU and below the operator control panel (OCP).
PROTECTION AND COMMUNICATION SUBMODULE (PCOM)
The PCOM submodule contains a digital signal processor (DSP) which
samples the current and voltage signals from the ACR and processes
them to derive the basic power system information such as current/
voltage/frequency/real power/reactive power etc. This is then used by
the general-purpose processor (GPP) to provide protection and
communications functions e.g. over-current protection. It also presents
this data to the outside world via various communications protocols.
Surge protection on the communications interfaces is described below:
SWITCHGEAR SUBMODULE (SWGM)
The SWGM submodule uses controlled pulses of current to trip or close
the ACR. In the base controller, used with this manufacturers ACRs,
the current is supplied by capacitors. In the retrofit controller, the current
is supplied by the controller battery.
Operator Interface/ Door Assembly The operator interface is provided by a separate module - the basic
display unit (BDU) with its own processor. The BDU comprises the
electronics compartment cover, the OCI with LCD display, a membrane
keyboard and its controlling microcomputer, and the WSOS5
communications port.
The BDU is attached to the door of the cubicle and the OCI can be
accessed through a hatch in the front door. Under normal
circumstances the hatch, which can be latched open, is the usual
access point to the OCI.
When you are commissioning the ADVC, you can lock the door open
and swivel the OCI open 90 degrees to the door. See Figure 1 (page 4-
4). This allows you to gain access to the panel at the same time as
commissioning the equipment in the customer compartment.
Ports Protection
RS232 Port A Not protected, Internal use only
RS232 Port B Not protected, Internal use only
RS232 Port C Not protected, Internal use only
RS232 Port D Not protected, Internal use only
RS232 Port E Not Protected, Internal use only, Used for BDU
V23 Tested to 1kA, 15kV, MOVs to ground
RS485 Tested to 1kA, 15kV, MOVs to ground
10BaseT Tested to 1kA, 15kV, MOVs to ground
Control Electronics Operation
4-3
The BDU plugs into Port E of the CAPE and uses this port for its power
and communications
WSOS5 Interface
To use WSOS5 to upload or download data, connect your PC serial port
to the maintenance port provided below the OCP. Use an RS232, DB9
male to DB9 female, straight-through cable.
Customer Compartment The compartment is fitted with a panel tray that facilitates the mounting
of your equipment e.g. a radio or modem including any special
interfaces. See Figure 1 (page 4-4). The compartment has a terminal
block for the radio power supply and power for accessories such as an
IOEX.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
4-4
Figure 1: Advanced Controller
Operator Interface Customer Equipment Compartment
(PSU)
(CAPE)
Batteries
with customer equipment fitted
Control and Protection
Enclosure
Power Supply Unit
Control Electronics Operation
4-5
Figure 2: ADVC Block Diagram
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
4-6
Operator Control Panel
5-1
5 Operator Control Panel
This manual contains many examples of display interface screens. In
general, the language chosen for these examples is international
English. In some cases, screen text will differ if the configured language
is English (USA).
Description The operator control panel (OCP) is mounted on the door of the ADVC
and accessed via the hatch in the door.The OCI consists of a four-line
liquid crystal display (LCD) and keypad with switches and light emitting
diodes (LEDs). Together these hardware features provide a user
interface to monitor and control the ACR. The OCI turns ON
automatically when the hatch is opened and OFF when it is closed. The
OCI also turns OFF automatically if no keys are pressed for 10 minutes.
Pressing any key for 1 second will reactivate the panel.

# Item Description
Display Back-lit LCD, 4 line with 40 characters per line.
Close key Generates a Close request to the CAPE when the
panel is active. A red LED is embedded in the key.
Enable/
Disable Close
switch
Disables the Close key. When the switch is in the
Disable position the close coil in the recloser is
electrically disconnected from the control electronics.
Thus the switch provides a physical isolation point for
the control circuitry. The recloser cannot be closed and
an audible alarm in the panel will sound. The CLOSE
key operates normally when the switch is in the
Enable position.
Trip key Generates a Trip request to the CAPE when the panel
is active. A green LED is embedded in the key.
Enable/
Disable Trip
switch
Disables the Trip key. When the switch is in the
Disable position the trip coil in the recloser is
electrically disconnected from the control electronics.
Thus the switch provides a physical isolation point for
the control circuitry. The recloser cannot be opened
and an audible alarm in the panel will sound. The TRIP
key operates normally when the switch is in the
Enable position.
Custom Menu
key
Gives access to the custom menu which was
configured using WSOS5. The custom menu is
configured to provide a regular, updated data display
by allowing a cycle of up to 12 screens. See Custom
Menu on page 14-7.
System OK The red System OK LED flashes while the controller is
operating normally.
Enter key Press this key in order to commit a setting change that
has been made. (Unlike the adjacent Quick Keys, the
ENTER key is not configurable.)
Configurable
Quick Key
Default linkage is to AUTO ON/OFF. See Quick Keys
on page 5-4.
Configurable
Quick Key
Default linkage is to PROT GROUP. See Quick Keys
on page 5-4.
Configurable
Quick Key
Default linkage is to EARTH PROT. See Quick Keys
on page 5-4.
Configurable
Quick Key
Default linkage is to LOCAL/REMOTE. See Quick
Keys on page 5-4.
Figure 3: Operator Control Interface
1
2 3
4 5
6
7 8 9 10
11 12
13 14 15
16 17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
11
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
5-2
Display Groups The OCI displays are organized into logical groups called Display
Groups. Within each group is a menu of pages and some pages have
sub-pages.
RIGHT scroll
key
Select the next screen in a display group or, if a
setting is selected, increase its value.
SELECT key Press to SELECT a data field/setting so that it can be
changed. (Where a page contains more data fields
than can be displayed in the visible lines, continuing to
press SELECT will display the rest of the data fields.
LEFT scroll
key
Select the previous screen in a display group or,
if a setting is selected, decrease its value.
MENU scroll
key
Displays the first page of the next group. Pressing the
MENU key after changing a setting causes the setting
change to take effect.
ALT The alternative function key gives access to an
alternative Event Log display.
# Item Description
13
14
15
16
17
Figure 4: Display Group Navigation
Operator Control Panel
5-3
Page Layout The display area consists of four lines, each forty characters long.
The top line of the display is the page title. To the right of the title is a
letter, indicating the display group to which the page belongs:
The next three lines are the data on display. Most displays have six data
fields.
A field may contain either:
a setting, which can be changed - ON/OFF is the most common; or
a status.
Changing Settings Three types of settings can be changed:
Operator settings
Password protected settings
Protection settings
Operator Settings
Find the display page containing the setting to be changed:
1 Press the MENU key to display the group you require.
2 Communications Group (only) is divided into subgroups for different
protocols. Press SELECT to display the subgroup you require.
3 Press to display the page you require.
4 Press SELECT to highlight the setting. A highlighted setting blinks.
Alternatively, if a QUICK KEY is linked to the setting, you can use it to
go directly to the relevant display page where you will find the
highlighted setting. (See Quick Keys on page 5-4.)
5 Once you have selected the setting to be changed, use or
to change its setting.
6 Press ENTER to activate the new setting.
Password Protected Settings
Some settings are password protected. You will be prompted for a
password before you can change the setting. To enter the password:
1 Press either of the keys until the first character of the
password is displayed.
2 Press the SELECT key.
3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the password is complete.
4 Press Enter.
While the operator panel is ON you will not be required to enter the
password again.
The default factory password is AAAA but you can change it using the
Windows Switchgear Operator System (WSOS5) program. The factory
password does not have to be remembered - the controller prompts you
for it automatically.
Code Display Group
S System Status Display Group
P Protection Display Group
M Measurement Display Group
A Automation Display Group
C Communications Setup
E Event Log
- - - - - - - - - - - - Page Title - - - - - - - - - Code
Field Field
Field Field
Field Field
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
5-4
Protection Settings
Protection settings are password protected. To change a protection
setting, follow the steps detailed in the Operator Settings section above
but, in addition, enter the password when prompted. When you have
completed the setting change by pressing ENTER, the following
message will flash at the top of the screen:
Active Protection Setting has changed.
At this point, the changed setting will be displayed but not in service. If
further setting changes are required, they can be made now.
When you have completed making all the setting changes you require,
press ENTER. The following text will be displayed:
CHANGED ACTIVE PROTECTION SETTING [A]
The changed active PROTECTION SETTINGS are now in service.
Select the MENU or ENTER key to continue.
The changed settings are now in service. Press MENU or ENTER to
return to the normal menu display.
Navigating Within Display Groups Refer to the diagram inside the controller door or to the Installation and
Maintenance Manual for details of navigation within groups.
Page Layout The display area consists of four lines, each forty characters long.The
top line of the display is the page title. To the right of the title is a letter,
indicating the display group to which the page belongs:

The next three lines are the data on display. Most pages have six data
fields.
Quick Keys The operator settings that you will frequently change can each be linked
to a QUICK KEY. You use a QUICK KEY for instant display and
selection of the linked setting which, otherwise, you would have to find
by navigation.
You can link operator settings to individual Quick Keys using the
operator control panel or WSOS5.
A QUICK Key can be set to Blank, if it is not required.
Otherwise, any one of the settings tabled at left can be linked to one of
the four Quick Keys.
Quick Key Configuration
The Quick Keys default configuration is given in the table at left. The
ability to re-configure the Quick Keys must be made available from the
SYSTEM STATUS - OPTIONS 3 page:
S System Status Display Group
E Event Log
M Measurement Display Group
P Protection Display Group
A Automation Display Group
C Communications Setup
.
LOCAL/Remote / Hit & Run Default setting, upper
left key
Loop Auto ON/OFF Configurable
Prot Group Default setting, lower
right key
Reset Flags Configurable
Work Tag ON/OFF Configurable
Auto ON/OFF
Protection OFF
Default setting, lower
left key
Cold Load ON/OFF Configurable
Earth Prot Default setting, upper
right key
Live Block Configurable
- - - - - - - - - - - - - OPTIONS 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - S
Config QK Available APGS Not Allowed
APGS Change 60s
Operator Control Panel
5-5
If Config QK is Available, make changes on the
SYSTEM STATUS - QUICK KEY SELECTION page:

To configure a Quick Key, press SELECT or ENTER. The following
screen is displayed with the first setting selected (blinking)
.
Press or to scroll through the list of settings that can be linked
to Quick Keys.
Press MENU or ENTER when the required setting is displayed.
To configure another Quick Key, press SELECT and repeat the above
procedure.
Each setting can only be assigned to one Quick Key.
If the operator selects a function that has been assigned to another
Quick Key that selection will revert to a blank setting.
When a Quick Key is changed an event is generated in the Event
Log.
Changing the quick keys configuration requires
updating of the panel quick keys using stickers provided
with controller. Failure to match software and panel may
cause incorrect operation of controller.
Using a Quick Key
1 Press a Quick Key at any time to display the relevant page, with the
linked setting selected:
2 Press the same Quick Key again to display the next setting option
for that setting. Repeat until you have displayed the setting you
require.
3 Press the ENTER key to activate the displayed setting AND, after a
short delay, to return to the page that was displayed when you first
pressed the Quick Key.
1
Whenever a Quick Key is in use the and SELECT keys are
disabled.
1. A particular option may not be available to the operator if it has been disabled on the
SYSTEM STATUS-OPTIONS page
- - - - - - - CHANGE QUICK KEY SELECTION - - - - - - S
LOCAL/Remote Earth Prot
Work Tag Enter Loop Auto
- - - - - - - - - QUICK KEY SELECTION - - - - - - - - S
LOCAL/Remote Earth Prot
Work Tag Enter Loop Auto
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
5-6
Event Log
6-1
6 Event Log
Introduction The ADVC maintains a log of up to 30,000 events that reflect changes
to the status of the switchgear, control electronics, and ADVC logic. The
log also records setting changes.
The events can be seen via the Event Log OCI display group. The
event log display will update automatically with new events. The most
recent event appears on the bottom line of the screen and older events
are scrolled upwards. When the event log is full, newest events replace
oldest events.
All events are date and time stamped to a 10ms resolution and
displayed in the order that they occurred. The source of each event is
also recorded.
It is possible to apply event category filters when viewing events.
WSOS5 software can also be used to read and display the event log. In
addition to OCI-like time stamp, source identification and filter category
features, it also has text searches and go to a particular date/time. The
event log can be saved as a text file or as a csv file. Refer to the
WSOS5 help file for more information.
A complete list of events is given at Appendix M - List of Events (page
M-1).
Reading the Event Log The event log display group is one of the main display groups described
in Display Groups on page 5-2 and shown in Figure 4 (page 5-2).
Within the Event Log display group, pages are navigated as follows
Up to four events of the event log are visible at any one time with the
newest event at the bottom of the display page and the oldest event at
the top of the display page. Pressing scrolls the event log to show
older events and pressing causes the event log to show newer
events.
Pressing the SELECT key at any time shows the Change Event Filter
page; pressing the MENU key returns from the filter page to the event
log.
While the event log is displayed, pressing the ALT key at any time will
show any available extra information about the currently visible events.

Advanced Controller Operations Manual
6-2
Typical Event Log Trip Sequence
Display
The following event log is an example of a phase trip sequence with two
trips to lockout
The following event log is an example of a sequence reset.
Setting Change Events A settings change can come from a variety of sources - WSOS5,
operator control panel, SCADA protocol, and IOEX. The controller
includes in its log information regarding the source of each setting
change.
If the ALT key is pressed whilst the event log is on the display then the
date and time details are replaced with extra information that includes
the setting source and, if applicable, the protection group, curve, and
trip number. Pressing the ALT key again will redisplay the date and time
information.
The identification codes for sources are:
-------------------- EVENTLOG ------------------E Comment
08/06/05 09:27:52.64 Lockout Lockout
08/06/05 09:27:52.63 C 305 Amp C phase current at trip
08/06/05 09:27:52.63 B 302 Amp B phase current at trip
08/06/05 09:27:52.63 A 303 Amp A phase current at trip
08/06/05 09:27:52.36 Prot Trip 2 2nd trip after 17.26s
08/06/05 09:27:52.36 Phase Prot Trip Phase element trip
08/06/05 09:27:52.36 Prot Group A Active Protection group A
08/06/05 09:27:35.10 Pickup Pickup again
08/06/05 09:27:33.70 Automatic Reclose 1st reclose
08/06/05 09:27:33.69 C 302 Amp C phase current at trip
08/06/05 09:27:33.69 B 300 Amp B phase current at trip
08/06/05 09:27:33.69 A 301 Amp A phase current at trip
08/06/05 09:27:33.42 Prot Trip 1 1st trip after 17.27s
08/06/05 09:27:33.42 Phase Prot Trip Phase element trip
08/06/05 09:27:33.42 Prot Group A Active Protection group A
08/06/05 09:27:16.15 Pickup Start of fault (pick up)
------------------ EVENT LOG ------------------E Comment
09/01/05 10:39:22.50 Sequence Reset Sequence reset after 10s
09/01/05 10:39:12.50 Automatic Reclose 1st reclose
09/01/05 10:39:12.49 C Max 301 Amp C phase current at trip
09/01/05 10:39:12.49 B Max 302 Amp B phase current at trip
09/01/05 10:39:12.49 A Max 300 Amp A phase current at trip
09/01/05 10:39:12.22 Prot Trip 1 1st trip after 17.27s
09/01/05 10:39:12.22 Phase Prot Trip Phase element trip
09/01/05 10:39:12.22 Prot Group A Active Protection group A
09/01/05 10:38:54.95 Pickup Start of fault (pick up)
Identifier Settings change source
WSOS Windows SOS5 change
OCP Operator control panel change
PTCL SCADA protocol change
IOEX IOEX change
Event Log
6-3
As it is possible for multiple WSOS5 applications to be simultaneously
connected to the controller via Ethernet, a source identification of
WSOS can be insufficient information. For WSOS5 over Ethernet
connections the first four letters of the PC's login name are logged. The
usage of "WSOS" is therefore restricted to serial port point to point
communication links only.
For example the standard display:
becomes:
:
when you press the ALT key.
In the above example it can be seen that:
WSOS5 has been used to set a Very Inverse IEC255 curve for
phase trip 2, group D
the OCP has been used to set the controller's RS-232 Port B
communications parity to EVEN
the work tag has been applied via a SCADA protocol
communications link
the controller has detected restoration of load supply. There is no
setting change source.
Dual Events Sometimes an event is reported as two related lines in the event log.
The second event expands upon the reason for the first. Dual events
can be recognized as they have the same time stamp.
For example:
:
In the above example it can be seen
At 16:35:40.22 A close operation was denied because the
switchgear was in the wrong mode (remote or local).
At 16:39:58.17 Quick Key 1 was remapped to be Work Tag Applied/
OFF
08/06/0611:05:50.25 Very Inv IEC255
08/06/0611:07:15.66 Parity EVEN
08/06/0611:09:23.03 Work Tag Applied
08/06/0611:10:35.19 Load Supply ON
WSOS Phase Trip 2 D Very Inv IEC255
OCP RS232-B Parity EVEN
PTCL Work Tag Applied
Load Supply ON
08/06/06 16:35:40.22 Wrong Mode
08/06/06 16:35:40.22 Operation Denied
08/06/06 16:39:58.17 Quick Key 1 Changed
08/06/06 16:39:58.17 Work Tag
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
6-4
Event Filtering As the controller can log a very large number of events it is possible to
filter the events to show only those of interest. Up to six filter categories
can be active at any one time. The filters are cumulative ie selecting two
filters will mean only those events that fall into either category will be
shown.
The controller supports the following filter categories.
An event may belong to two categories. For example, Switch connected
can be seen in both switchgear and controller categories.
Active filters can be set via the Change Event Filter page, which you
can access by pressing the SELECT key while the event log is
displayed. After setting the filter, pressing the MENU key will return the
display to the event log with filter active. Selecting a new filter may
cause a momentary delay when returning to the event log.
Category Description Example Events
All All events are shown.
Protection
(PRTN)
A general grouping of all protection
related events.
Pick up,
Prot Trip 1,
Dead lockout,
Single Shot,
A Phase Lost
Earth Prot ON,
NPS Available
Loop Auto ON
Controller
(CTRL)
A general grouping of all controller
hardware related events.
Battery Normal,
Aux Supply Fail,
SW Load Completed,
Battery health test
START
Load Profile
System Frequency 50Hz
Switchgear
(SWGR)
All messages from Switchgear. Switch Connected
Mechanical Fail,
Cap Charge Fail,
Trip Coil Isolated,
SCEM type,
Contact < 20%
DNP3 Trip Request
New SCEM data
Network
(NWRK)
A general grouping of all electrical
system events.
A1 Live
C2 Dead
Load Supply ON
Power Quality
(PQ)
All quality of supply messages. SOM Available
Source Out 00 m 59s
Harmonics ON
V2a:THD 1.5%
Waveform captured
WSOS All setting changes with source
WSOS5 are shown.
Panel
(OCP)
All setting changes with source OCP
are shown.
Protocol
(PTCL)
All setting changes and system status
messages that are SCADA protocol
related are shown.
DNP Address 5,
DNP Unsol ON
PTCL SEF ON
IOEX All setting changes and system status
messages that are IOEX related are
shown.
IOEX Input 1 ON,
IOEX Output 2 OFF
IOEX Earth Prot ON
Settings All setting changes with source
WSOS, Panel, Protocol or IOEX are
shown.
Event Log
6-5
The following display is an example of an event filter set up:
From the above example it can be seen that the event log is to display
all events that are in the Protection or Switchgear categories.
- - - - - - - - - CHANGE EVENT FILTER - - - - - - - - E
Protection Switchgear
- blank - - blank -
- blank - - blank -
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
6-6
Work Tags and Controller Mode
7-1
7 Work Tags and Controller Mode
An important feature of the ADVC is that it is always in one of two
modes, either Local or Remote, and can have a Work Tag applied by
Local or Remote operators.
The mode and the tag specify the circumstances under which the ACR
can be closed to ensure operational safety.
Definition of Local or Remote User There are three kinds of local user:
Operator Control Panel (OCP).
An IOEX card designated as Local. This might apply, for example,
to an IOEX card used in a substation to provide control from a
remote panel inside a building.
A PC running WSOS5 plugged into the Maintenance Port on the
front of the BDU (under the hatch). See Windows Switchgear
Operating System (WSOS5) on page 13-1.
There are three kinds of remote user:
An IOEX card designated as Remote. This might apply, for
example to an IOEX card used to interface to a SCADA system
remote terminal unit. See Accessories on page 15-1.
A SCADA control protocol. These are always designated as remote
users. Full information is given in the relevant protocol manual.
A PC running WSOS5 communicating via radios or modems
connected to a telemetry port configured as a remote port.
Communication ports must be configured as local or remote on the
OCP. The Ethernet port may only be configured as remote.
Local/Remote/Hit and Run Mode The Local/Remote/Hit and Run selection is carried out on
SYSTEM STATUS - OPERATOR SETTINGS 1.
There is a quick key on the panel to make this fast and easy. Pressing
the LOCAL/REMOTE quick key causes that data field (on the SYSTEM
STATUS - OPERATOR SETTINGS 1 screen) to be displayed. Pressing
the same quick key again changes the mode. Press the ENTER key to
activate the selected mode.
Depending on the mode set, closing and tagging can only be carried out
by the designated local or remote users.
Local/Remote/Hit and Run does not affect automatic reclosing.
The Local/Remote mode can only be set from the Operator Control
Panel.
Local Mode
In this mode only a local user can manually close the ACR. (It can still
close automatically with the auto-reclose function.)
This means a user can go to the ADVC, set local control mode and
know that remote closing is disabled.
Only a local operator can apply or remove the Work Tag when the
ADVC is in Local Mode.
Remote Mode
In this mode only a remote user can manually close the ACR. (The ACR
can still close automatically with the Auto-Reclose function.)
Only a remote operator can apply/remove the Work Tag when the
controller is in Remote Mode.
If the local operator is denied a close operation or a Work Tag due to
being in Remote Mode then the operator panel will flash the message
Not Allowed Change to Local Control and/or remove Work Tag .
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
7-2
Hit and Run
The Hit and Run feature provides a delay between a local operator
control TRIP or CLOSE request and when the ACR operates.
This feature is particularly useful in a Substation where occupational
safety regulations may require personel to vacate the area when the
ACR operates.
There is no change to the operation of the ACR when Hit and Run is
turned OFF.
Hit and Run is made available via WSOS5 only. When Hit and Run is
Available it is configured at SYSTEM STATUS - Hit and Run .
The following tables show, for the Hit and Run screen, all fields, and the
field description.
Once Hit and Run has been made available via WSOS5, it can then be
configured either via WSOS5 or from the Hit and Run screen in the
System Status menu. Finally, Hit and Run is turned ON at the LOCAL/
Remote field at SYSTEM STATUS - OPERATOR SETTINGS 1: Hit and
Run ON.
When Hit and Run is turned ON the operator has a countdown period of
30 seconds to press either TRIP or CLOSE, otherwise the setting will
revert to the setting prior to turning Hit and Run ON.
This will also occur when The Hit and Run request is aborted by using
the SELECT key.
When Hit and Run is turned ON the following screen is displayed:
:
When the operator presses TRIP or CLOSE the following screen will be
displayed and the countdown will begin:
Hit and Run S
Hit/Run Close OFF
Hit/Run Close 120s
P Hit/Run Trip OFF
Hit/Run Trip 120s
P
Table 1: Hit and Run all fields
Field Description
Hit/Run Close OFF
Hit/Run Close 10s
Hit and Run Close Time
This field is used to delay a local operator panel close
request.
Range: OFF, 10 to 120 sec (increments of 5 secs).
Factory default is OFF
Hit/Run Trip OFF
Hit/Run Trip 10s
Hit and Run Trip Time
This field is used to delay a local operator panel trip
request.
Range: OFF, 10 to 120 sec (increments of 5 secs).
Factory default is OFF
Table 2: Hit and Run field descriptions
- - - - - - - - Hit and Run Countdown- - - - - - - - S
Press TRIP or CLOSE within 30 sec
Press the SELECT key to abort
Work Tags and Controller Mode
7-3
The panel will beep every two seconds Hit and Run is on. The beeping
will become more rapid during the final ten seconds to action.
An event will be recorded in the Event Log at the start of the Hit and
Run period and the end of a Hit and Run countdown or timeout.
Work Tagging Applying the Work Tag ensures that closing cannot take place at all,
either by a local operator, a remote operator or automatically. Once
applied, neither a local user, remote user or the Auto-Reclose function
can close the recloser. Therefore, using Work Tag protects operators
working on live lines.
Work Tag mode is activated when Work Tag is applied irrespective of
Auto Reclose mode status, and is deactivated when the Work Tag is
removed.
It is not possible for the operator to close the ACR whilst in Work Tag
mode.
If the Work Tag is deactivated whilst Auto Reclose is ON then the Auto
Reclose mode will be entered immediately.
If a trip occurs whilst the Work Tag is applied then an event is logged to
identify the Work Tag mode.
Work Tags are applied and removed from SYSTEM STATUS -
SWITCHGEAR STATUS: Work Tag OFF.
When applied the operator panel flashes the message Warning
Work Tag Applied.
Only a local user can apply/remove the tag when the controller is in
Local Mode and only a remote user can apply/remove the tag when the
controller is in Remote Mode. This means that a local user can remove
the Work Tag applied by a remote user but they must first put the
controller into Local Mode. If the local operator is denied a close
operation due to the Work Tag being applied the operator panel will
flash the message Not Allowed Change to Local Control and/or
remove Work Tag.
Work Tag Mode Protection Settings Work Tag protection settings are used to provide an appropriate
protection curve when the Work Tag has been applied.
There are separate protection pages for Phase Work Tag Protection,
Earth Work Tag Protection and NPS Work Tag Protection. Each page is
similar to the normal protection trip pages.
- - - - - - - - - Hit and Run Countdown - - - - - - - - S
TRIP will occur in 120 sec
Press the SELECT key to abort
- - - - - NPS WORK TAG PROTECTION TRIP - A - - - - P
Inv IEC255 Time Multiplier 1.00
No Instantaneous
Minimum 0.00s Additional 0.00s
- - - - - PHASE WORK TAG PROTECTION TRIP - A - - - P
Inv IEC255 Time Multiplier 1.00
No Instantaneous
Minimum 0.00s Additional 0.00s
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
7-4
Appendix K (page K-1) details all the fields for the Work Tag Phase,
NPS and Earth protection settings.
- - - - EARTH WORK TAG PROTECTION TRIP - A - - - P
Inv IEC255 Time Multiplier 1.00
No Instantaneous SEF Definite 5.0s
Minimum 0.00s Additional 0.00s
Protection Features
8-1
8 Protection Features
Introduction The Nu-Lec Advanced Controller has the following protection elements
which can be configured by the user to trip the circuit-breaker:
In addition, the ADVC supports Loop Automation.
The following protection features may change the way protection
operates :
Protection OFF
Single Shot Mode
Work Tag Mode
Sequence Reset
Sequence Control
Live Load Blocking
Dead Lockout
High Current Lockout
Inrush Restraint
Cold Load Pickup
Automatic Protection Group Selection
Directional Blocking
Directional Protection
In general, all protection elements operate simultaneously and
independently of each other. There are a small number of interactions
between protection elements which are described in later sections of
this manual.
Protection Settings The behaviour of the ACR during a fault depends on the Protection
Settings.
There are a very large number of settings which modify the tripping
behaviour of the ACR. These are described in more detail in the
following sections.
You can change protection settings using:
WSOS5 configuration software
WSOS5 can change any protection settings when connected locally
or remotely.
Operator Control Panel
A local operator can change any protection settings using the
Operator Control Panel.
Telemetry Protocol
The telemetry protocol can not change protection settings, but can
turn protection features on and off.
Protection Element
Phase Overcurrent (abbreviated OC in this manual)
Earth (Ground) Overcurrent (abbreviated EF in this manual)
Sensitive Earth (Sensitive Ground) Overcurrent (abbreviated SEF in this
manual)
Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (abbreviated NPS in this manual)
Under Frequency (abbreviated UF in this manual)
Over Frequency (abbreviated OF in this manual)
Loss of Phase (abbreviated LOP in this manual)
Any combination of these elements
can be turned ON or OFF.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-2
You can set up passwords to control who can change protection
settings.
Protection Groups There are up to 10 groups of protection settings (referred to as
Protection Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I and J). Each Protection
Group can have different settings. You nominate which one of the 10
Protection Groups is active. The active Protection Group settings will
be in operation during a fault.
Though 10 Protection groups are
available, you may use fewer. The
minimum number is 1, or 2 if directional
protection is used.
If you have enabled Directional Overcurrent Protection then the number
of available Protection Groups is reduced to 5 pairs because each
Protection Group has two sets of settings - one set for forward faults
and one set for reverse faults. In this case Groups A and B are the first
Directional Group, Groups C and D are the second Directional Group
etc.
Basic Protection Operation Overcurrent Protection Element Pickup and Reset
The ADVC protection logic starts operating when the measured
currents exceed the trip current setting. This condition is called Pickup.
The protection element timing logic starts timing when the measured
currents exceed the trip current setting multiplied by the phase
threshold multiplier (or other multipliers active at the time). This
condition is called Timing.
The protection element timing logic pauses when the current in a
protection element is less than the Trip Current setting multiplied by the
phase threshold multiplier (or other multipliers active at the time). This
condition is called Pause.
The protection element timing logic resets when the primary current is
less than 90% of the trip current setting for the fault reset time. This
condition is called Reset.
This reset behaviour is identical to the
reset behaviour of the Nu-Lec Pole Top
Control Cubicle.
The reset current is fixed at 90 % of the Trip Current setting. The user
specifies a Reset Time. The Reset Time can be set from 0 to 10,000
ms in 1 ms steps.
This diagram illustrates the pickup, pause and reset characteristics for a
Trip Current setting of 1000 A, a Reset Time of 100 ms, and a phase
threshold multiplier of 1.0.
Protection Features
8-3
Overcurrent Protection Element Time / Current
Characteristics
The following time/current characteristics are available for the
overcurrent protection elements:
Instantaneous (abbreviated in this manual as INST)
Definite Time (abbreviated in this manual as DT)
Inverse Current / Time (Inverse Definite Minimum Time, abbreviated
in this manual as IDMT)
Instantaneous (INST)
The Instantaneous characteristic causes the protection element to
operate instantaneously when the current is above the pickup setting. In
practice, the protection algorithms take a certain minimum time to
calculate the current, so the minimum operating time is greater than
zero. Instantaneous characteristics can be modified by a minimum time
setting where the trip needs to be delayed by a set time.
Definite Time (DT)
The Definite Time characteristic causes the protection element to
operate at a fixed time after the element has picked up, regardless of
the current magnitude. The current must be above the pickup setting
throughout the Definite Time. Definite Time can be modified by an
instantaneous setting only. The threshold current multipliers, and
minimum, additional, and maximum times do not apply.
Inverse Current/Time (IDMT)
The Inverse Current Time characteristic causes the protection element
to operate in a time inversely proportional to the magnitude of the
current. There are many different inverse time characteristics. Some
have been standardized by organisations such as IEC and IEEE. Refer
to Appendix E (page E-1) and Appendix F (page F-1).
There are also 42 curves available for coordinating with fuses etc. Refer
to Appendix G (page G-1).
The basic characteristics of the Inverse Time curvse can be modified by
the use of time multipliers, instantaneous multipliers, additional times,
minimum times and maximum times.
Time Current Characteristic Modifiers
Time current characteristics can be modified by using the following
modifiers:
Minimum Time
Maximum Time
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-4
Additional Time
Time Multiplier
Threshold Multiplier
Instantaneous Multiplier
MINIMUM TIME
This setting modifies the time current characteristic so that the
operating time is not less than the Minimum Time regardless of the
current magnitude. This can be used to provide grading between ACRs
and fuses on the same feeder.
MAXIMUM TIME
This setting modifies the time current characteristic so that the
operating time is not more than the Maximum Time regardless of the
current magnitude. This is used to guarantee tripping when the current
is only slightly above the pickup setting.
ADDITIONAL TIME
This setting modifies the time current characteristic so that the
operating time is greater than the standard time specified by the time
current characteristics by a fixed additional amount. This can be used to
provide grading between multiple ACRs on the same feeder.
TIME MULTIPLIER
This setting modifies the time current characteristic so that the
operating time is a multiple of the standard time specified by the time
current characteristics. This can be used to provide grading between
multiple ACRs on the same feeder.
THRESHOLD MULTIPLIER
This setting modifies the time current characteristic so that the
protection will not operate unless the current exceeds the Pickup
Setting X the Threshold Multiplier. This can be used to provide grading
between an ACR and an upstream or downstream protection device on
the same feeder, when the other devices have a different time/current
characteristic.
Protection Features
8-5
INSTANTANEOUS MULTIPLIER
An Instantaneous Multiplier can be applied to an Inverse Time
characteristic. This setting forces an instantaneous trip if the current
exceeds the Pickup Setting X Instantaneous Multiplier. This can be
used to provide faster tripping for high current faults.
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) can be set up to be either available or not
available and is a password protected feature located in SYSTEM
STATUS-OPTIONS 1:SEF Available. This allows the engineer to ensure
that SEF cannot be turned on at inappropriate locations.
If SEF is available then the operator can turn it on and off from
SYSTEM STATUS-OPERATOR SETTINGS 1 without a password, by
cycling between the following three settings:
E/F OFF, SEF OFF - Earth Fault off and SEF off.
E/F ON, SEF OFF - Earth Fault on and SEF off.
E/F ON, SEF ON - Earth Fault on and SEF on.
E/F OFF will not be available if E/F OFF is set to Not Allowed. SEF
operates as an additional definite time element. The Threshold Current
Multipliers, and Minimum, Additional, Maximum Times do not apply.
SEF will cause the ACR to trip when the earth current rises above the
SEF trip current setting for longer than the SEF definite time setting.
The SEF definite time setting can be set differently for each trip in a
reclose sequence.
Live Load Blocking
When Live Load Block is selected, all close requests will be disregarded
if any load side terminal is live.
Live Load Blocking is selected from PROTECTION SETTING 3
(A...J):Live Load Block OFF/ON.
Live Load Blocking uses the Live Terminal Threshold set on
SYSTEM STATUS-PHASE VOLTAGE and POWER FLOW:LIVE if >2000.
Cold Load Pickup (CLP) When a typical heterogenous load has been without supply for a period
of time (hours) it loses its diversity when the supply is restored. After
supply is restored the load is higher than before the loss of supply
because all heater, refrigerator or air conditioner thermostats have
turned on. The longer the time without supply the greater the loss of
diversity, therefore the higher the load current after supply is restored.
This increase in load current may cause overcurrent protection
elements to operate.
The purpose of the Cold Load Pickup feature is to compensate for the
loss of diversity automatically so the increased load will not cause
overcurrent protection to operate. It works by measuring the time that
supply is lost and then temporarily raising the Trip Current for a time
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-6
according to the time supply was lost. The increase in Trip Current is
determined by the Cold Load Multiplier which is set by the user.
The user specifies a multiplier and a time. The controller detects when
load current is zero (also refer to Inrush Restraint ) and starts a timer
called the Operational Cold Load Time. Using this timer, an Operational
Cold Load Multiplier is calculated using the following formula:
The Operational Cold Load Multiplier is used to modify the phase and
earth Threshold Current Multipliers.
Therefore the phase and earth protection thresholds will increase at a
rate specified by the customer when the load is turned off but only up
to the User Set Cold Load Multiplier. The controller calculates the new
thresholds every minute.
For example, if the User Set Cold Load Time is 2 hours, the User Set
Cold Load Multiplier is x2 and the current has been off for 1 hour, then
the Operational Cold Load Time is 1 hour. Consequently the phase and
earth thresholds are increased to equal the Operational Cold Load
Multiplier of 1.5.
Once load current is restored the Operational Cold Load Timer starts to
count down. This means that the Operational Cold Load Multiplier
returns to 1 in one hour and hence the phase and earth threshold
currents also return to their normal values.
The rate of increase and decrease of
threshold currents is the same.
In this way, lost load diversity is automatically compensated for. It
doesn't matter where the current was turned off (e.g. at the substation
or at the recloser) the compensation will still work.
Some operational constraints are listed below:
The User Set Cold Load Time and the User Set Cold Load Multiplier
are set on PROTECTION SETTING 5 (A...J) .
The Operational Cold Load Multiplier will not go above the user set
Cold Load Multiplier or below the user set thresholds on
PROTECTION SETTING 1 (A...J) .
On power up of the ADVC, the load is assumed to be diverse, i.e.
the Operational Cold Load Time is zeroed and Cold Load IDLE will
be displayed.
Cold Load affects phase and earth protection thresholds including
instantaneous but not SEF.
High Current Lockout and Definite Time settings are not affected.
Cold Load Pickup cannot be used if normal currents are expected to
drop below 2.5A and should be turned off.

+ = 1) - Mult' Load Cold Set (User x

Time Load Cold Set User
Time Load Cold l Operationa
1 Mult' Load Cold l Operationa
Protection Features
8-7
Cold Load Pickup Example
Cold Load Pickup Status Display
The operational status of the cold load pickup is shown at SYSTEM
STATUS-OPERATOR SETTINGS 2:Cold Load.
This can show the following states:
Cold Load OFF: Cold load pickup has been configured OFF in the
currently active protection group, no operator control of Cold Load
Pickup is possible.
Cold Load IDLE: Cold Load Pickup is configured ON but Cold Load
Pickup is not affecting the thresholds. This is probably because the
load current is on and the Operational Cold Load Time is zero. This is
the normal condition.
CLP 60min X1.5mult (for example). The display shows the current
Operational Cold Load Time and Multiplier. This affects the protection
thresholds. In this example the Operational Cold Load Time is 60mins
and the Multiplier is 1.5.
Operator Control of Cold Load Pickup
When Cold Load Pickup is configured ON at the currently active
protection group it can be further controlled by using SELECT, and the
keys.
These keys enable the following:
The figure opposite is an example of the Cold
Load settings applied to an inverse curve. In
this example, the Threshold Current Multiplier
is set to x1.1, the Instantaneous Multiplier is
set to x1.75, the Cold Load Multiplier is set to
x2 and the Cold Load time is set to 2 hours.
Part A indicates how the Current Multiplier will
vary according to the length of time the line
current is turned off and then restored.
Part B indicates the original protection curve.
Part C indicates the protection curve that is
constructed for use when the line current is
first restored (T1 in Part A) and the Current
Multiplier corresponds to 2 times the setting
current. In this case an Instantaneous Trip will
not occur until the line current exceeds 2 times
the setting current.
Part D indicates the protection curve that is
constructed for use when the line current has
been restored for 1 hour (T2 in Part A). This
corresponds to a Current Multiplier of 1.5 times
the setting current. Note that an
Instantaneous Trip will now occur at the set
value of 1.75 times the setting current. After
the power has been restored for 1.8 hours
the Cold Load Multiplier will revert to the
original Threshold Multiplier settings and the
protection curve will be as in Part B.
Figure 5: Cold Load multiplier (CLM) settings
applied to protection curves
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-8
Zero the Operational Cold Load Time. Note that if the load current is off
the Operational Cold Load Time will start to increase.
Set the Operational Cold Load Time and Multiplier to a desired value.
Note that the Operational Cold Load Time will then increase or
decrease depending on whether the load current is OFF or ON.
Automatic Protection Group
Selection
Sometimes a ACR is used at a location in a supply network where the
power flow can be in either direction depending on the configuration of
the rest of the network.
One example of this is a network tie point where the operator may have
to select a different group of protection settings to compensate for a
change in power flow when changing the network configuration.
Emergency switching configurations may require more than one pair of
Protection Groups.
This feature is not the same as
Directional Blocking.
Enabling Automatic Selection
Automatic Protection Group Selection (APGS) allows the appropriate
Protection Group to be selected automatically without the need for
operator intervention. It works by automatically changing between
Protection Groups depending on the direction of power flow.
APGS is made available by setting SYSTEM STATUS-OPTIONS
2:APGS Allowed.
Either the Primary or Alternate Group required is selected.
APGS is then enabled by selecting SYSTEM STATUS-OPERATOR
SETTINGS 1:Protection Auto.
The operator display will indicate the currently active set by displaying
SYSTEM STATUS-OPERATOR SETTINGS 1:Auto A to J Active.
On power down, the controller saves the current status of Protection
Auto and uses that status to determine the active Protection Group on
power up.
Disabling Automatic Selection
APGS is turned OFF (disabled) either by:
A change of power flow configuration.
Selecting a Protection Group other than SYSTEM STATUS-
OPERATOR SETTINGS 1:Protection Auto.
Setting SYSTEM STATUS-OPTIONS 2:APGS Not Allowed.
Selection Rules
When the APGS feature is enabled, the active Protection Group is
automatically selected in accordance with the following rules:
There is a maximum of five pairs of APGS Protection Groups: A&B,
C&D, E&F, G&H and I&J. Each pair comprises a Primary Protection
Group and Alternate Protection Group respectively.
The number of APGS pairs depends on how many protection sets are
selected to be available. Where an odd number of Protection Groups
have been selected the last group does not participate in APGS.
Protection Auto can not be selected if this last group is active.
When the power flow is in the positive direction (source to load)
Primary Protection Group A, C, E, G or I is used.
When the power flow is in the negative direction (load to source)
Alternate Protection Group B, D, F, H or J is used.
For APGS to generate a change, from Primary to Alternate Protection
Group, the power flow must be greater than 50kW in the negative
direction (load to source) for longer than the period set on
SYSTEM STATUS: OPERATOR SETTINGS 2.
To revert to the Primary Protection Group the power flow must be
greater than 50 kW in the positive direction (source to load) for longer
Protection Features
8-9
than the period set on SYSTEM STATUS-OPTIONS 2:APGS
Change 60s.
Protection Elements Protection elements use the fluctuation of voltages and currents in the
ACR to drive protection logic which trips the ACR after a period of time
determined by the specific protection settings used. The OC protection
elements can be configured to be directional, that is they will only
respond to fault current flowing in a particular direction.
The currents used for overcurrent protection are determined using
analog and digital signal processing circuitry as shown in Figure 6
(page 8-9)
The circuitry works as follows:
The current in the circuit is reduced by a factor of 2000 in the 2000/1
CTs built into the ACR.
The CT secondary current is converted to a voltage by the three
current sense resistors.
A fourth current sense resistor in the CT common converts the
residual current to a voltage for use in the SEF element.
The voltages across the phase sense resistors are amplified in
variable-gain amplifiers. These ensure high accuracy over a wide
range of currents. The amplifier for the residual current sense
voltage has a fixed gain because the SEF element operates over a
small current range.
The outputs of the amplifiers are connected to 16 bit Sigma Delta
Analog to Digital Converters (ADC) with an effective sampling rate
of 3200 samples per second. The output of the residual current
Figure 6: ADVC Protection Block Diagram
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-10
sense resistor amplifier is passed through a low pass filter to reduce
second and third harmonics.
The output of the ADC is processed by the Digital Signal Processor
(DSP) using various proprietary algorithms which measure the true
RMS value of each current averaged over 1 cycle, updated at 2.5
ms intervals. These true RMS values are used by the protection
logic in the PowerPC microprocessor to determine if and when to
trip the ACR.
Voltages used in the directional overcurrent protection elements are
processed as follows:
Phase-earth voltages on the bushing terminals are converted to a
small current by the capacitive voltage sensors in the bushings.
These currents are amplified and converted to voltages in the
controller.
The analog-digital conversion and digital processing of these
voltages works in the same manner as for the currents.
Current Operated Protection Elements
The following are all current operated elements with their own separate
trip current settings.
Phase Overcurrent
Earth
Sensitive Earth
Negative Phase Sequence
Each element is constantly monitoring the instantaneous level of phase,
earth or NPS current as required.
Protection pickup will occur for each element when the trip current
setting for that element multiplied by any threshold multipliers that are
active, is exceeded.
The time delay between pickup and when a trip command is issued by
the ACR depends on which protection trip is active at the time and the
timing characteristic configured for that protection trip.
Up to twenty-four separate timing characteristics may need to be
configured if 4 trips to lockout as well as Single Shot and Work Tag trips
are being used, i.e. 4 protection elements X 6 protection trips).
At any given time, any one of six protection trips will be active: Trip 1,
Trip 2, Trip 3, Trip 4, Single Shot, or Work Tag.
Providing the ACR is configured for 4 trips to lockout (refer to Lockout
), trips 1 through 4 will occur in sequence when tripping is caused by a
persistent fault and Auto Reclose is On. If the ACR is configured for 2
trips to lockout, trips 3 and 4 need not be configured for any of the
protection elements.
The Single Shot trip (refer to Single Shot Tripping ) is active when
Auto Reclose is off but can also be active for a set time when the ACR
is closed manually. Thus if the ACR is closed onto a fault it will trip
according to the Single Shot settings.
The Work Tag trip is active whenever the Work Tag is applied. When the
Work Tag is applied, protection trip timing will occur according to the
Work Tag settings for the element that has picked up.
Phase Overcurrent (OC) Elements
The number of Phase OC elements varies depending on whether the
overcurrent protection has been configured to be directional. If
overcurrent protection is directional, then there are two independent OC
elements per phase. If overcurrent protection is non-directional then
there is one independent OC element per phase.
The OC elements in each phase are driven by the rms current in the
corresponding phase.
Protection Features
8-11
One of the OC elements responds to currents in the designated forward
direction, the other OC element responds to currents in the designated
reverse direction. Each OC element can be configured to have an
Inverse Time characteristic, a Definite Time characteristic, or an
Instantaneous characteristic.
Each phase in a direction share the same settings. So, for example, it is
not possible to have different settings for A phase and B phase in the
forward direction.
Detailed descriptions of the various time/current options are given later
in this chapter.
The direction of current flow for the OC elements is determined by
calculating the phase angle between the currents and voltages while
the OC elements are picked up.
Earth Fault (EF) Elements
The number of EF elements varies depending on whether the
overcurrent protection has been configured to be directional. If
overcurrent protection is directional, then there are two independent EF
elements. If overcurrent protection is non-directional then there is one
independent EF element.
The EF elements are driven by the residual current, that is the real-time
vector sum of the three phase currents. The residual current used for
the EF elements is calculated in real time by digitally summing the
phase currents, sample by sample:
Residual current = A phase current + B phase current + C phase
current
Ie = Ia + Ib + Ic
Note that the Zero Sequence Current (I
0
) is defined as:
I
0
= (Ia + Ib + Ic) / 3
So, the zero sequence current is one third of the residual current.
Similarly the residual voltage is given by :
Ve = Va + Vb + Vc
The term Earth Current may not be
strictly correct on a four wire network,
where the residual current may also
include the neutral current.
One of the EF elements responds to current in the designated forward
direction, the other responds to current in the designated reverse
direction. Each EF element can be configured to have an Inverse Time
characteristic, a Definite Time characteristic, or an Instantaneous
characteristic.
Detailed descriptions of the various time/current options are given later
in this chapter.
The direction of current flow for the EF elements is determined by the
phase relationship between the zero sequence voltage and current
while the EF elements are picked up.
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) Elements
The number of SEF elements varies depending on whether the
overcurrent protection has been configured to be directional. If
overcurrent protection is directional, then there are two independent
SEF elements. If overcurrent protection is non-directional then there is
one SEF element.
The SEF elements are driven the by the measured residual current. The
residual current used for the SEF elements is determined by measuring
the current in the common connection between the three CTs in the
ACR.
Residual current = A phase current + B phase current + C phase
current
Ie = Ia + Ib + Ic
Note that the Zero Sequence Current (I
0
) is defined as:
I
0
= (Ia + Ib + Ic) / 3
So, the zero sequence current is one third of the residual current.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-12
Similarly the residual voltage is given by :
Ve = Va + Vb + Vc
The term Earth Current may not be
strictly correct on a four wire network,
where the residual current may also
include the neutral current.
One SEF element responds to current in the designated forward
direction, the other SEF element responds to current in the designated
reverse direction.
The SEF elements have a Definite Time characteristic only.
The direction of current flow for the SEF element is determined by the
phase relationship between the zero sequence voltage and current
while the SEF element is picked up:
Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Elements
The number of NPS elements varies depending on whether the
overcurrent protection has been configured to be directional. If
overcurrent protection is directional, then there are two independent
NPS elements. If overcurrent protection is non-directional then there is
one independent NPS elements.
The NPS elements are driven by the Negative Phase Sequence
current. The Negative Phase Sequence current used for the NPS
elements is calculated in real time by digitally summing the phase
currents, sample by sample:
Similarly Negative Phase Sequence Voltage is calculated in real time by
digitally summing the phase voltages, sample by sample:
One of the NPS elements responds to current in the designated forward
direction, the other responds to current in the designated reverse
direction. Each NPS element can be configured to have an Inverse
Time characteristic, a Definite Time characteristic, or an Instantaneous
characteristic.
The direction of current flow for the NPS elements is determined by the
phase relationship between the NPS voltage and current while the NPS
elements are picked up.Detailed descriptions of the various time/current
options are described later in this chapter.
Directional Overcurrent Protection All Overcurrent Protection elements can be configured to be directional,
so that protection element operation depends on the direction of the
fault current. This is useful when the network has multiple sources of
supply, or is configured with closed rings instead of radial feeders.
Directionality is a global setting, i.e. it applies to all overcurrent
elements in all Protection Groups. For example, it is not possible to
have the OC element directional and the EF element non-directional.
There are three directional options :
Directionality is enabled using the Feature Selection screen of WSOS5.
See Feature Selection on page 14-1.
I
1
I
a
I
b
240 ( ) I
c
120 ( ) + + =
V
1
V
a
V
b
240 ( ) V
c
120 ( ) + + =
Directional Setting
Non-directional (the
default setting)
The overcurrent elements operate regardless of the fault
current direction
Directional Protection Each overcurrent element has two groups of settings,
one operates for faults in the forward direction and one
operates for faults in the reverse direction
Directional Blocking The overcurrent elements operate for faults in the user-
selected direction (forward or reverse) but do not
operate for faults in the other direction
Protection Features
8-13
Directional Protection When Directional Protection is enabled, each overcurrent element has
two groups of settings, one operates for faults in the forward direction
and one operates for faults in the reverse direction.
Determining Direction
The ADVC monitors the phase angle between voltage and current per
phase in order to determine the direction of power flow through the
recloser.
This means that when a fault is detected, the protection can determine
on which side of the recloser the fault occurred.
Different protection settings can be applied to determine the pickup
current and time to trip depending on which side of the recloser the fault
has occurred.
Because the direction of a fault needs to be determined before the
correct settings can be applied there is a minimum time that can be
applied.
This time penalty is approximately 25ms for all elements (Phase, Earth
SEF and NPS) and will be present for all types of over current
protection. This timing takes place concurrently with protection timing.
Nu-Lec N series reclosers utilize the bushing designations U1,U2,V1,V2,
W1 & W2. (The 2 side is the side to which the pole mounting bracket is
fitted.) Either side can be designated load or source at: PHASE VOLTAGE
and POWER FLOW: Source, Load on the control panel or via the measurement
page on WSOS5. Fault current flowing from source to load is considered a
forward fault and fault current flowing from load to source as a reverse
fault. It is essential to take account of the physical orientation of the breaker
before determining configuration of source and load.
Protection Groups
When Directional Protection is ON, there are two protection groups
active. A/B, C/D, E/F, G/H or I/J.
The first of these groups is known as the Forward protection group and
the other is the Reverse protection group e.g. if C/D are active, C is
Forward and D is Reverse.
The ADVC monitors the pickup settings for both protection groups.
Initially, when a pickup is detected, the direction of the fault is not known
and a delay of 25ms occurs before the fault direction is determined.
Once the direction of the fault is known, and the pickup is active for that
direction, a pickup, either forward or reverse, is reported.
The pair of protection groups that become active when Directional
Protection is turned on depends on which group was active at the time.
If Directional Protection is turned on when protection group A is active,
then groups A and B become active.
The two active protection groups (Forward and Reverse) can be
configured differently. This means that the pickup current and time to
trip for a given fault can be different.
Also the ADVC can coordinate with different upstream devices
depending on which direction the fault current is flowing.
Directional Protection Operation
When fault current is detected, the power flow direction is checked to
determine if the fault has occurred on the Source or Load side of the
recloser.
If the fault is discovered to be on the Load side and the forward
protection group trip setting has been exceeded, a Pickup Fwd event is
logged and the protection calculates the time to trip according to the
forward protection group settings. If the active protection groups are A
and B, then Group A is used.
If the fault is discovered to be on the Source side, a Pickup Rev event is
logged and the protection calculates the time to trip according to the
reverse protection group settings, in this case Group B.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-14
When the currently picked up curve times out, a trip will occur.
In the case of a bolted earth fault on or
close to the recloser terminals, the
voltage to earth measured by the CVTs
would be nearly zero.In this situation,
the ADVC would not be able to
determine the direction of power flow
through the switchgear.
LOW V CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
A trip cannot occur until the direction has been resolved. To resolve the
direction of the fault current, Directional Protection utilises the new
features of the ADVCs Digital Signal Processor (DSP) which directly
calculates the fault angle.
To do this accurately, the DSP requires a minimum polarising voltage
for each element.This minimum voltage may not be present during all
fault conditions.Where insufficient voltage is present, protection will
behave according to the Low V configuration settings.
Where the minimum voltage required to determine the direction of
power flow through the switchgear is not present, the ADVC has three
options depending on the settings applied.
The options are:
Ignore Low V
With this option, the voltage is ignored altogether and the power
flow direction is not determined. Both active protection groups will
react as though they would if they were the active group and
directional protection was off.
Use the forward configuration settings for the protection.
With this option it is assumed that the power flow is in the forward
direction. The time to trip is calculated according to the forward
protection group settings.
Use the reverse configuration settings for the protection.
With this option, it is assumed that the power flow is in the reverse
direction. The time to trip is calculated according to the reverse
protection group settings.
POLARISING VOLTAGE
Each protection element has its own polarising voltage used to
determine the direction of the fault current.
OC: Use Phase/Earth V 500+ V, this value is not configurable or
dependent on the nominal system voltage.
Default: 500V
Range: 500V
EF: use zero phase sequence voltage (VZPS) and compare to
Nominal Phase/Earth Voltage
Default: 20% of Nominal Phase/Earth
Range: 5% - 100%
SEF: Use zero phase sequence voltage (VZFS)and compare to
Nominal Phase/Earth Voltage
Default: 5% of Nominal Phase/Earth
Range: 5% - 100%
NPS: use negative phase sequence voltage (VZPS)
Default: 0V
Range: 0 - 2000 VNPS
Protection Features
8-15
CHARACTERISTIC ANGLE
In order to correctly resolve fault direction it is necessary for the network
characteristic angles to be known. Angles must be set for:
Phase
Earth and SEF
Negative Phase Sequence
Setting a positive phase characteristic angle of 45 degrees means that
it has been calculated using the network parameters that a phase fault
will cause a fault current that leads the phase voltage by 45 degrees.
During an actual fault, the angle of the fault current may vary from this
calculated angle due to arc resistance or other external current paths.
Any fault current angle that falls within +/- 90 degrees of the calculated
value will be recognised as a forward fault. In this case any angle
between -45 and 135 degrees.
Any fault currents outside this range will be in the reverse fault region
indicating a reverse fault.
Consider the phasor diagrams in Figure 8: (page 8-15) for an earthed
neutral system with a single resistive phase to earth fault on the A-phase.
The voltage on the A-phase is reduced and the residual voltage phasor
is as shown. The current in the A-phase is increased and the residual
phasor (earth current) is as shown.
The characteristic angle of this hypothetical fault is 180 degrees, that is
the current is 180 degrees out of phase with voltage. Therefore if this
situation applied for single phase earthed faults in the network the earth
characteristic angle would be set for -180 degrees using the
Directional Blocking 2: Earth Characteristic Angle -180 Deg parameter.
The characteristic angle of the earth fault is determined by the network
characteristics (line resistance and reactance, neutral earthing
arrangement) and the fault characteristics (such as the nature of the
short-circuit - solid or arcing, fault impedance and earth resistance).
The expected characteristic Angle will be approximately:
Minus 90 for systems with unearthed neutrals.
For typical solidly or impedance earthed medium voltage distribution
networks the residual current lags the residual voltage by more than
180. This is of course equivalent to leading the voltage by less than
180.
The expected characteristic Angle will be approximately:
Plus 135 deg for systems with solidly or impedance earthed
transformer neutrals.
Turning Directional Protection On/Off
Directional Protection can be turned On and Off via WSOS5 only.
Figure 7: Characteristic Angle
Figure 8: Earth/SEF directional protection
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-16
When Directional Protection is turned On or Off a warning message will
be displayed informing you of what protection groups will become active
or inactive and giving you the option to continue or cancel the operation.
Directional Protection On/Off is selected on the WSOS5 Configuration -
> Feature Selection page.
When directional protection is turned off, what was the forward
protection group becomes active i.e. if groups E and F were active
when directional protection was turned off, Group E will become active.
When turning Directional Protection ON two things should be
considered:
Firstly, Directional Protection and Directional Blocking are mutually
exclusive. If Directional Blocking is On, it must be turned Off before
Directional Protection can be turned On.
Secondly, Directional Protection cannot be turned On if Automatic
Protection Group Selection is Allowed. Directional Protection will be
greyed out if APGS is Allowed.
The active protection groups will include the group that was previously
active plus the other one in the same pair e.g. If A was active, then A
and B become active; if D was active then C and D become active etc.
When Directional Protection is on, the active protection group
display on the Operator Settings 1 screen changes to show both
protection groups that are now active.
The protection menu screens include either FWD or REV in the title
line of each screen for which there are separate settings for the
forward and reverse directions respectively.
FWD or REV in the title line does not imply that the displayed
protection group is active. All displayed protection groups will
include either FWD or REV in their title line whenever Directional
Protection is on.
Two protection groups are active and displayed in bold. In this case
the active protection groups are A and B.
Most of the Directional Protection settings are on the Directional
Protection page for the forward active protection group.
The settings displayed for the reverse active protection group are a
copy of the settings displayed for the forward group.
A Forward or Reverse Auto Reclose setting appears on the
Forward and/or Reverse Global Settings screens
If either Forward or Reverse Auto Reclose is selected OFF, Auto
Restore ON/OFF becomes available for that group.
Trips to Lockout
The number of trips to lockout will never exceed 4.
There are separate sequence counters for the forward and reverse
direction protection groups.
If a fault current causes a trip in the forward direction it will be fwd trip 1.
If, after an auto reclose, another fault is detected in the reverse direction
- - - - - - - - - - Operator Settings 1 - - - - - - - - S
LOCAL CONTROL ON EF ON SEF OFF
Auto Reclose ON NPS ON
Prot A/B Active
- - - - - - - -REV PROTECTION SETTING 1B - - - - - - P
Group B Displayed Copy OFF
Phase Trip 200 Amp Earth Trip 100 Amp
Phase Threshold 1.1 Earth Threshold 1.1
Protection Features
8-17
thus causing a reverse protection trip, it will be trip number 1 of the
reverse protection sequence.
If this pattern repeats, the recloser will go to lockout on the 4th actual
trip regardless of the direction of any particular trip.
Lockout occurs whenever the number of trips to lockout is reached or
there is an operator-initiated trip. A lockout applies to both the forward
and reverse directions. This means that it is not possible to have a
lockout in one direction only.
Sequence Reset
There is a single Sequence Reset Timer setting for both the forward
and reverse protection groups.
Whenever an automatic reclose occurs following a trip, the sequence
reset timer will be started. When this timer expires, both forward and
reverse sequence counters will be reset to trip 1.
If another trip occurs after an automatic reclose before the sequence
reset timer expires, the timer will reset and start again when the next
automatic reclose occurs.
Auto Reclose
When Directional Protection is On, each protection group has its own
Auto Reclose On/Off setting.
Automatic reclose will only occur following a protection trip if:
Auto Reclose is On for the protection group that was active for that
trip and:
The global Auto Reclose setting was On prior to the trip.
For Auto Reclose to work with Directional Protection on, Auto Reclose
must be selected ON on the Control page.
As well as this, Auto Reclose must be on for either the forward or
reverse protection group for Auto Reclose to work for faults in the
forward or reverse direction respectively.
With Directional Protection On, selecting Auto Reclose Off for any of the
protection groups allows Auto Restore to be configured.
Auto Restore
Auto Restore is used to close a recloser with Directional Protection,
after the fault that tripped the device has been cleared.
Auto Restore would normally be used where the reclose was part of a
closed loop topology to restore the loop to the condition it was in prior to
the fault.
Auto Restore is configured by selecting the On setting and entering a
value for the Auto Restore Time between 3 and 1800 seconds.
Live Load Blocking cannot be selected ON when Auto Restore is on as
that would prevent Auto Restore from operating.
Auto Restore will close the recloser after it has done a Single Shot trip
due to a fault and the voltage on both sides of the recloser has been
restored to normal operating values for the Auto Restore time.
Auto Restore will only operate on a recloser that has voltage sensing on
both sides of the recloser.
If Auto Restore is On, the recloser cant go to lockout as this would
imply that there will not be any further automatic close attempts. Instead
of Lockout, a End of Sequence event is logged.
The Auto Restore timer starts timing when the voltage on both sides is
restored to normal.
When Auto Restore performs a close the recloser is in Single Shot
mode and thus will go to Lockout if a trip occurs before the Single Shot
timer expires.
Auto Restore and Auto Reclose are mutually exclusive.
Substation No 1
Substation No 2
1 2
1 2
2
1 Auto
Restore
ON
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-18
The Auto Restore On/Off field and Auto Restore Time will be
unavailable if the recloser does not have 6 CVTs.
When an End of Sequence event is logged, the message:
ACR will close if Source and Load are restored
flashes in the title line of the display.
There is no retry counter.
This means that the Auto Reclose and then Auto Restore loop could
continue forever. This would be unlikely, as the voltage would not be
restored if there were a real fault that could not be cleared.
V
ZPS
Balancing
The zero phase sequence voltage is measured from the instantaneous
sum of all three phase voltages.
Even in unfaulted networks the ZPS voltage is not likely to be zero
because the three phase voltages are not going to be perfectly
balanced.
This could lead to problems in high impedance fault conditions because
the ZPS voltage due to the earth fault might be dominated by the out-of-
balance phase voltages which might lead to incorrect determination of
direction.
Vzps balancing overcomes this by continually balancing the phase
voltages under normal conditions.
When balancing is enabled, compensation for phase imbalances of up
to 20% of the phase to earth voltage will be applied at a rate of 0.6% of
phase/earth voltages per second. This allows correct determination of
the direction of much lower level faults than would otherwise be
possible.
Balancing is paused when any of the following conditions occur:
A protection pickup occurs.
The SCEM data is not valid.
The switchgear is open.
Any of the bushings are dead.
When balancing is enabled the OCI shows Vzps Balancing while the
system is continually adjusting for balance, and Vzps Balance Paused
when the balancing is suspended for one of the above reasons.
When balancing is disabled the OCI shows Vzps Balance Disabled.
Directional Blocking Directional blocking is an optional protection feature that restricts
tripping on faults to a designated side of the ACR. Only one time-
current curve is used. At the time of the trip, the direction of the fault is
tested and tripping or blocking occurs as per the operator setup. If this
option is not available on your controller, contact your distributor.
Directional blocking has traditionally been used on simple
interconnected primary network schemes as per Figure 9 (page 8-19)
to secure supplies to important loads. In this simplistic case, ACRs L1
and L2 would be fitted with directional blocking protection facilities. Both
would be set to trip for faults in the reverse direction with power flow
from load to source but to block if the power flow is in the forward
direction from source to load. A fault between S1 and L1 would mean
that S1 would see fault current, S2 would see fault current L2 would see
fault current from source to load and would block. L1 would also see
fault current, flowing from load to source, due to the in feed from S2.
Protection Features
8-19
L1 would be set to trip faster than S2. In this instance L1and S1 would
both trip to Isolate the fault. Supply would be maintained to the load.
Radial systems use Directional Blocking to prevent nuisance tripping if
particular network conditions are causing "false" earth faults. In this
case directional blocking can prevent nuisance tripping by blocking
faults in the source direction and only responding to faults in the load
direction. This is particularly relevant on systems where the neutral is
not earthed. In this instance the earth fault current, due to a line fault, is
solely generated due to the line capacitance. There will also be an in-
feed from adjacent circuits supplied from the same substation bus bar.
The direction of current flow as seen by the ACRs connected to the bus
bar will be different on the un faulted circuits to the faulted circuit.
Characteristic Angle
Please refer to Directional Protection , subsection Characteristic
Angle (page 8-15).
The user sets the characteristic angle to define the forward and reverse
fault regions for the network and then determines in which region the
protection is going to trip or block. The characteristic angle is set using
the PROTECTION SETTINGS: Directional Blocking 2: Phase
Characteristic Angle 45 Deg parameter.
Tripping/Blocking directions are set separately for Phase, Earth and
SEF Protection. See "Parameters to be Configured" - page 8-22 for
details of setting up directional blocking.
Phase Directional Blocking
When phase overcurrent protection picks up, the controller determines
the phase relationship of the voltage and current phasors for the faulted
phases taking account of the characteristic angle to determine the
direction of the power flow.
If directional blocking is selected for the faulted direction, then the trip is
blocked and no trip takes place. The device will pick up and the trip
timer will be decremented for a fault in the blocked region however the
trip will be inhibited.
The direction is selected on PROTECTION SETTINGS: Directional
Blocking 1: Phase Trip Fwd. This parameter can be set for forward
tripping, reverse tripping or both forward and reverse tripping (i.e. non-
directional).
The ADVC needs a polarising voltage to determine the direction of the
fault. Please refer to Directional Protection , subsection Polarising
Voltage (page 8-14). If there is a bolted phase fault on the terminals of
the ACR there may not be sufficient voltage to determine direction. In
this case whether the trip is blocked or armed is determined by
PROTECTION SETTINGS: Directional Blocking 1: Low V Block ON
Figure 9: Sample Fault Situation
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-20
Setting Low V Block ON will block trips for low voltages. Setting Low V
Block OFF will trip for faults in either direction irrespective of the
direction if the voltage is low.
Earth/SEF Directional Blocking
Earth and SEF protection operate in a similar manner to phase
directional protection, except that the fault direction is determined using
earth current and the zero phase sequence voltage.
The Earth and SEF elements can be independently set to trip for faults
in the forward or reverse direction or in both directions on
PROTECTION SETTINGS: Directional Blocking 1.
For SEF protection the fault is likely to be of a high impedance and the
zero sequence voltage may be much lower, particularly in earthed
neutral networks. The ADVC uses a polarising voltage to determine the
direction of the fault. Please refer to Directional Protection ,
subsection Polarising Voltage (page 8-14).
For both Earth and SEF protection, if the residual earth voltage is too
low to determine fault direction then the trip is either blocked or armed
depending on the corresponding setting of PROTECTION
SETTINGS: Directional Blocking 1: Low Vzps Block ON.
It is important to determine the actual
earth fault characteristic angle for the
network and set this parameter
accordingly.
Setting Low VZPS Block ON will block trips for low voltages. Setting Low
Vzps Block OFF will trip for faults in either direction irrespective of
the direction if the voltage is low. The residual voltage Vzps is not
likely to be zero even in un-faulted networks.See "SEF Zero
SequenceVoltage Alarm" - page 8-20
SEF Zero SequenceVoltage Alarm
The directional blocking facility includes detection of high zero
sequence voltage (VZPS) above the PROTECTION SETTINGS:
Directional Blocking 3:Min SEF Vzps 5% setting whether SEF protection
has picked up or not. This is called the Zero Sequence Voltage alarm.
The alarm is set when Vo is sustained above the Min SEF Vzps 5%
threshold for longer than PROTECTION SETTINGS: Directional
Blocking 3:High Vzps alarm 5 sec time and is cleared when Vzps falls
below the threshold again.
The alarm status is displayed on the operator control panel page
PROTECTION SETTINGS Directional Blocking 3:High Vzps Alarm ON/
OFF and is available for transmission by telemetry protocols.
This indication can be useful in unearthed neutral networks for earth
fault detection. The Zero Sequence Voltage Alarm is affected by the
voltage balancing described in "VZPS Balancing" - page 8-18 and it is
expected that Zero Sequence Voltage Balancing is disabled if the Zero
Sequence Voltage Alarm is used.
Event Record
When the controller first resolves the fault direction an armed or
blocked event is logged in the event record. The controller then
continues to resolve the direction for the duration of the fault. Each time
the direction changes another event is written. For all protection
elements that pickup a separate event is written. The fault current
maximum events are recorded in the normal way when the protection
resets.
In the case of an earth or SEF pickup an event is logged to record the
value of VZPS at the time of the maximum earth current.
Protection Features
8-21
The Directional Blocking events are listed in the table below. These
events only occur when Directional Blocking is ON.
Configuration pages
SYSTEM STATUS-OPTIONS 2:DIRB
Available must be set or the Directional
Blocking pages will not be available.
This section shows each of the three Directional Blocking configuration
pages on the Operator Control Panel display. These pages are in the
Protection Settings Display Group following Protection Setting 5
(A-J).
Event Text Explanation
Earth Dir Arm
An earth protection pickup occurs and tripping is enabled in
the faulted direction. The trip takes place as normal.
Earth Dir Block
An earth protection pickup occurs but tripping is blocked in
the faulted direction. The recloser does not trip.
Earth Low Vzps
Arm
An earth protection pickup occurs and tripping is enabled
because the zero sequence voltage (Vzps) is less than the
user-specified level and Low Vzps blocking is OFF. The trip
takes place as normal.
Earth Low Vzps
Block
An earth protection pickup occurs and tripping is blocked
because the zero sequence voltage (Vzps) is less than the
user-specified level and Low Vzps blocking is ON. The ACR
does not trip.
Phase Dir Arm A phase overcurrent pickup occurs and tripping is enabled
in the faulted direction. The trip takes place as normal.
Phase Dir Block A phase overcurrent pickup occurs but tripping is blocked in
the faulted direction. The ACR does not trip.
Phase Low V Arm A phase protection pickup occurs and tripping is enabled
because the voltage on all three phases (V) is less than
500 V and Low V blocking is OFF. The trip takes place as
normal.
Phase Low V Block A phase protection pickup occurs and tripping is blocked
because the voltage on all three phases (V) is less than 500
V and Low V blocking is ON. The ACR does not trip.
SEF Dir Arm A SEF pickup occurs and tripping is enabled in the faulted
direction. The trip takes place as normal.
SEF Dir Block A SEF pickup occurs but tripping is blocked in the faulted
direction. The ACR does not trip.
SEF Low Vzps Arm A SEF protection pickup occurs and tripping is enabled
because the zero sequence voltage (Vzps) is less than the
user-specified level and Low Vzps blocking is OFF. The trip
takes place as normal.
SEF Low Vzps
Block
A SEF protection pickup occurs and tripping is blocked
because the zero sequence voltage (Vzps) is less than the
user-specified level and Low Vzps blocking is ON. The ACR
does not trip.
Vzps 99999V This event is generated to record the value of the zero
sequence voltage Vzps) at the time of the maximum earth
or SEF current.
Table 3: Fault Direction Event Record
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-22
These pages have the general format:: (please refer to Appendix K-
Protection Pages (page K-1) for details).
Only displayed if Sequence
Components are available.
:
:
:
Parameters to be Configured
Directional Blocking requires the following parameters to be set
correctly:
Directional Blocking to be made available at SYSTEM STATUS -
Options 2:DIRB Not Available.
The Source/Load direction to be set at SYSTEM STATUS -
PHASE VOLTAGE and POWER FLOW.
The System Voltage to be set at Directional Blocking 3:Nom P-E
Volts 6.3kV.
This is the nominal phase/earth system voltage.
Residual voltage balancing configured if required to improve SEF
detection in earthed systems at Directional Blocking 3:Vo
Balance Disabled.
High Vo alarm time, or disabled at Directional Blocking 3:High
Vo Alarm Disabled.
For Phase and Earth/SEF, the following parameters must be set at
Directional Blocking 1, 2 and 3.
The characteristic angle.
The trip direction.
- - - - - - - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 1A- - - - - - - P
Phase: Trip Fwd&Rev Low V Block OFF
Earth: Trip Fwd&Rev Low V Block OFF
SEF : Trip Fwd&Rev Low V Block OFF
- - - - - - - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 2A - - - - - - P
NPS: Trip Fwd & Rev Low VNPS Block OFF
- - - - - - - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 3A- - - - - - - P
Phase Characteristic Angle -45 Deg
Earth Characteristic Angle 135 Deg
NPS Characteristic Angle1 180 DEG
- - - - - - - -DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 4A - - - - - - -P
Nom P E V 6.3kV Min Earth VZPS 20%
Min SEF VZPS 5%
Min NPS VZPS 0V
- - - - - - - -DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 5A - - - - - - - P
High VZPS DISABLED VZPS Block DISABLED
HIGH VZPS Alarm OFF
Protection Features
8-23
The low voltage blocking to be turned on or off.
The minimum Vo for Earth and SEF protection (set independently).
In addition, the normal protection parameters must also be set.
Turning Directional Blocking On/Off
Directional blocking can only be turned on and off via WSOS5.
When directional blocking is turned on or off in the ADVC, a warning
message will be displayed informing you that the current protection
groups directional blocking settings will become active or inactive and
giving you the option to continue or cancel the operation.
Voltage Operated Protection Elements
Only available on ADVCs attached to
Nu-Lec ACRs or on ADVC V-Series
with VTs connected.
The following are all voltage operated elements:
Under Frequency
Over Frequency
Loss of Phase
Under and Over Frequency protection can be configured separately
and will cause the ACR to trip if the frequency of the voltage measured
on the terminal bushings goes outside the limits set for a predetermined
time.
An auto reclose cannot occur following either an under or over
frequency trip, but the protection settings can be configured to
automatically close the ACR when the frequency returns to normal.
Loss of Phase protection can be used to trip the ACR if the voltage on
one or two phases drops below a predetermined value for a pre-set
time. A loss of phase protection trip will always cause lockout. i.e. no
automatic reclose can occur.
Under and Over Frequency
Protection Elements
The ADVC can be configured to trip the ACR when the system
frequency is above (Over Frequency) or below (Under Frequency) user-
set frequencies for user-set times. The ADVC can also be configured to
automatically close the ACR when the frequency has returned to user-
set limits. To use UO Frequency, it must be made available via
SYSTEM STATUS: OPTIONS - U/O Freq Not Avail.
Under and over frequency protection
elements are only available on an
ADVC which is connected to an N-
Series or U-Series ACR or on a V-
Series ADVC with VTs connected.
Under Frequency Protection is commonly used to automatically shed
load when generation capacity is not adequate to meet load
requirements.
Over Frequency Protection is commonly used on systems with small
generators operating.
Frequency Measurement
Frequency is measured on each available terminal. The frequency
displayed and used for frequency protection is that of the first available
terminal with voltage measurement, selected in the order:
for the N-Series: A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2
for the U-Series: AI, BI, CI, and if external Cts are fitted, then AX,
BX, CX
for the V-Series: A135, B135, C135, A246, B246, C246.
The measured frequency is displayed on the Measurement Pages.
A typical measurement display looks like this: :
- - - - - - - - - SYSTEM MEASUREMENTS - - - - - - - - M
Current 0A Power P 0 kW
Voltage < 2000 Volt Power Q 0 kVAR
Freq Unavailable PF 0.00
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-24
The frequency value is updated every 0.5 seconds and averaged over
2.0 seconds. The displayed value is the measured frequency and is
valid whenever the voltage on the selected terminal is above or equal to
the Low Voltage Inhibit Threshold (LVIT).
When the voltage is below the LVIT on all available terminals the
display will show "Freq Unavailable".
Under/Over Frequency Tripping
When the measured frequency equals or exceeds the under or over
frequency trip threshold an Under or Over Frequency Pickup event is
generated and a Trip Delay Counter (TDC) is started.
The TDC is reset and an Under or Over Frequency Reset event is
generated each time the measured frequency equals or goes below the
threshold plus the dead band for any period of time. The Frequency
dead band is used to prevent a frequency value that is fluctuating
around the threshold from causing excessive pickup/reset events.
If the frequency remains equal to or greater than the Under or Over
Frequency Threshold for the specified number of cycles, the TDC
counts out and an Under or Over Frequency Trip event is generated
and a Trip Request is issued.
Figure 10 (page 8-24) shows the method of Tripping and "Normal
Frequency Closing" for Over Frequency. The same method applies to
Under Frequency only mirrored about the Nominal Frequency Axis.
If the "Normal Frequency Close" function is switched OFF a "Lockout"
event is generated after the trip and the Operator Settings Display
shows a "Lockout" Status.
Auto Reclose does NOT occur after an Under or Over Frequency Trip.
Normal Frequency Close
The "Normal Frequency Close" function closes the ACR automatically
after an Under or Over Frequency trip when the frequency has returned
to normal.
The automatic close occurs when:
Figure 10: Over Frequency Detection
Protection Features
8-25
The ACR tripped due to Under or Over Frequency Protection.
Normal Frequency Close" was ON before the trip occurred and is
still ON.
The frequency has returned to be less than or equal to the
Frequency Normal threshold and remained less than this threshold
plus the dead band
AND
the voltage on all three source side terminals has remained above
the LVIT, for the "Normal Frequency Close Time".
The Normal Frequency Close Timing is aborted every time that the
frequency exceeds the Normal Frequency threshold plus the dead band
or the voltage on any of the three source side bushings has fallen equal
to or below the LVIT.
A "Lockout" event is not generated when a Normal Frequency Close is
ON and the ACR trips on Under or Over Frequency Protection. The
Operator Settings display does not show "Lockout" and remains blank.
Whilst waiting for the frequency to return to normal, a special title will be
flashing on the top line of the operator display:
ACR will auto-close when frequency normal
When the frequency returns to normal status the flashing title becomes:
Freq Normal - ACR will close in xxxx secs
The "XXXX" denotes the period of time remaining before closing
occurs. In the final 10 seconds before actually closing the panel will
"beep" to warn the operator.
The Normal Frequency Close ON/OFF setting may be controlled either
via telemetry protocol or the configuration page.
A "Lockout" event will be generated if any of the following occur whilst
the controller is waiting for the frequency to become normal:
Normal Frequency Close is turned OFF.
Under Frequency Normal setting is changed.
Over Frequency Normal setting is changed.
Normal Frequency Close setting is changed.
LVIT setting is changed.
The Operator Settings page will display "Lockout" and the special titles
will be removed if any of the above occur.
Configuration
SETTING FREQUENCY PROTECTION ELEMENTS USING THE
OCP
This section details the Under/Over Frequency configuration pages
displayed on the OCP. Go to PROTECTION - UNDER/OVER
FREQUENCY PROTECTION within the Protection display group.
Two configuration pages are available within the group.
Page One:
The default settings at this page are:
- - - UNDER / OVER FREQUENCY PROTECTION 1- - - P
U/F Trip OFF O/F Trip OFF
U/F Trip at 49.0Hz after 4 U/F cycles
O/F Trip at 52.0Hz after 50 O/F cycles
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-26
The following table explains each of the above settings:
Page Two:
The default settings (for an N-Series ACR) at this page are:
The following table explains each of the above settings:
Field Explanation
U / F Trip ON/OFF This field allows the Under Frequency protection to be
enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).
Under Frequency tripping will not occur whilst set to OFF.
Range: OFF - ON
Default: OFF
Password: Yes
U / F Trip at 49.0Hz The frequency value at and below which an Under
Frequency Pickup will occur.
Range: 45.0 - U.F normal-deadband
Default: 49.0Hz
Password: Yes
After 4 U/F cycles The number of continuous cycles at and below the Under
Frequency Threshold required before an Under
Frequency Trip will occur.
Range: 2 - 1000
Default: 4
Password: Yes
O/F Trip ON/OFF This field allows the Over Frequency protection to be
enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).
Over Frequency tripping will not occur whilst set to OFF.
Range: OFF - ON
Default: OFF
Password: Yes
O/F Trip at 52.0Hz The frequency value at and above which an Over
Frequency Pickup will occur.
Range: O/F normal+deadband - 65Hz
Default: 52Hz
Password: Yes
After 50 O/F cycles The number of continuous cycles at and above the Over
Frequency Threshold required before an Over Frequency
Trip will occur.
Range: 2 - 1000
Default: 50 cycles
Password: Yes
Table 4: Under/Over Frequency Protection 1 fields
Field Explanation
U/F Normal 49.5Hz The frequency at or above which the Frequency is
deemed to be Normal.
Range: U/F Trip+Deadband - O/F Trip-Deadband
Default: 49.5Hz
Password: Yes
O/F Normal 50.5Hz The frequency at or below which the Frequency is
deemed to be Normal.
Range: U/F Trip+Deadband - O/F Trip-Deadband
Default: 50.5Hz
Password: Yes
Table 5: Under/Over Frequency Protection 2 fields
- - - UNDER / OVER FREQUENCY PROTECTION 2- - - P
U/F Normal 49.5Hz O/F Normal 50.5Hz
Freq Bushing A1 Low V Inhibit 5000V
Normal Freq Close OFF after 60 secs
Protection Features
8-27
SETTING FREQUENCY PROTECTION ELEMENTS USING WSOS5
The Frequency Protection page of WSOS5 has the same settings
options as the Operator Control Panel.
Fail to Operate Under Protection If the ACR fails to trip under protection, a mechanism fail will be logged
in the event record and no further trip attempts will occur until all the
protection elements have reset. When the next pickup/protection trip
sequence occurs the ACR will then attempt another trip.
If the ACR fails to auto reclose then it goes to lockout.
Setting Overcurrent Protection
Elements
Overcurrent Protection Elements can be set using the operator control
panel (OCP) but a more typical method would be via WSOS5.
Setting Overcurrent Protection Elements using WSOS5
The WSOS5 Protection Settings screens are shown below.
Freq Bushing Displays the terminals of the ACR being used for
frequency measurement (Status - not a setting)
Low V Inhibit The voltage at or below which the Under / Over
Frequency protection will be disabled.
Range: 2 - 15kV
Default: 5kV
Password: Yes
Normal Freq Close
ON/OFF
This field controls the use of the Normal Frequency Close
feature.
Range: OFF - ON
Default: OFF
Password: Yes
After 60 secs The time that the source voltage must have returned to
normal before auto closing takes place.
This field is only visible if Normal Frequency Close is ON.
Range: 1 - 1000
Default: 60 secs
Password: Yes
Table 5: Under/Over Frequency Protection 2 fields
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-28
This screen has common settings for all overcurrent trips in a reclose
sequence, including the number of trips before lockout.
Each trip in a reclose sequence has a screen for setting the reclose
time, time current curve characteristics, including the curve modifiers,
and the instantaneous multipliers.
Auto Reclosing A recloser (ACR) is a circuit-breaker with an electronic controller
(ADVC) providing measurement, communication, protection and auto
reclosing capabilities. Auto reclosing is the ability to automatically
reclose the ACR after a protection trip.
Auto reclosing is very useful on overhead networks where most faults
are caused by transient events (such as lightning, insulator flashover,
conductor clashing, birds and animals causing faults). When such a
fault occurs the electronic controller trips the circuit-breaker then
automatically recloses it after a time delay. Auto reclosing is not usually
appropriate for underground networks where faults are more likely to be
of a non-transient nature.
The number of recloses and the time delay between tripping and
reclosing are user configurable. Typically, you will configure up to three
recloses (up to four protection trips).
A series of protection trips followed by automatic recloses is called a
Reclose Sequence.
If the ACR has automatically reclosed the configured number of times,
but the fault is still present (such as a line down on the ground), the
ADVC will stop reclosing and the circuit-breaker will remain open. This
is called Lockout.
You can set different protection settings for each trip in a reclose
sequence. Typically the first trip may be very fast, followed by a rapid
Protection Features
8-29
reclose. Subsequently, the tripping and reclose times may be longer.
The final trip to lockout is typically fast.
Sequence Control
Sequence control causes the ACR to step to the next count in the
reclose sequence on reset of all protection elements whether or not the
ACR tripped. The sequence will only advance if Auto Reclose is on and
the Single Shot Timer has timed out.
Consider a situation where there are two ACRs in a feeder. Both are
programmed for fast tripping on the first trip and slow tripping on the
second trip in order to co-ordinate with fuses on the spur lines. Suppose
there is a fault downstream of the second ACR which is big enough to
be picked up by the first ACR as well. The ACR closest to the fault trips,
steps onto the second set of protection settings which is a slow trip and
then recloses. If the fault has not been cleared the ACR nearest to the
substation is still on its fast trip settings and will now trip. This situation
would result in unnecessary loss of supply to the load connected to the
first recloser.
This problem is overcome by setting Sequence control on in the ACR
nearest to the primary substation. When Sequence control is on, the
ACR steps onto the next stage in the protection trip sequence after it
has seen a fault whether that fault cleared without tripping. In this way
an upstream ACR will keep its sequence co-ordinated with a
downstream ACR. If the fault is cleared i.e. Sequence Reset, the trip
count will reset to zero after the sequence reset time in the normal way.
The SEF and NPS counters are also coordinated with the downstream
ACR and will increment if that element has picked up.
Sequence Reset
After a protection trip, the ACR is in a Reclose Sequence. If a
successful reclose occurs and the fault has cleared, the ACR will, after
a period of time, abort the reclose sequence. This is called a Sequence
Reset. The time after a successful reclose before Sequence Reset is
called the Sequence Reset Time, and is user configurable.
Lockout
Lockout is a state in which the ACR will not automatically reclose. The
ACR can be in the Lockout state for various reasons:
A complete Auto Reclose Sequence has occurred
The ACR has tripped in Single Shot mode (see below)
The ACR has tripped in Work Tag mode (see below)
Dead Lockout is ON, the ACR has tripped, and no voltage bushings
are live
Live Load Blocking has prevented an auto reclose
Manual Trip.
Dead Lockout
Dead Lockout prevents the ACR from reclosing after a protection trip if
all the source and load side terminals are dead. Dead Lockout is OFF
by default and is turned on using OPERATOR SETTINGS2: Dead
Lockout OFF.
Live Load Blocking
Live Load Blocking prevents the ACR from closing or reclosing after a
protection trip if any of the load terminals are live. Live Load Blocking is
OFF by default.
Single Shot Tripping
Under some circumstances you may want to prevent the ACR from auto
reclosing after a protection trip. For example, if a fault is detected as
soon as the ACR is closed it is unlikely to be of a transient nature. It
may be because safety earths have been accidentally left connected
after maintenance of the system. In this circumstance auto reclosing is
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-30
not appropriate, so the circuit-breaker will trip and lock out even though
Auto Reclose is on. This is called Single Shot Mode.
Single Shot Mode has its own protection settings and these can be
used to provide an appropriate protection curve when non-reclosing
operation is required, for example, when manually closing onto a fault..
You can configure Single Shot settings for OC, EF, SEF and NPS
protection in the same manner as for Trips 1, 2, 3 and 4. The EF, NPS
and OC Single Shot Protection trip settings can be selected individually
via separate protection pages. Each page is similar to the normal
protection trip page.
In Single Shot Mode the controller goes directly to lockout after one trip
and will not auto reclose.
Single Shot Mode is activated when:
Auto Reclose is turned off, and Work Tag is not applied.
For a set duration (Single Shot Reset Time) after the ACR is closed by
an operator command irrespective of the state of Auto Reclose. The
Single Shot reset time is set at PROTECTION SETTING 2 (A...J).
Single Shot Mode is de-activated when:
Auto Reclose is turned back on,
Work Tag is not active, and the Single Shot Timer expires without a
protection pickup occurring (see below).
When Single Shot Mode is active, it is displayed at SYSTEM
STATUS-OPERATOR SETTINGS 1.
When Single Shot Mode is active the values set on the relevant EF/OC/
NPS protection page are used.
When Single Shot Mode de-activates, protection reverts to the fully
programmed sequence.
1
A trip in Single Shot Mode generates a single shot event, preceded by
the Active Protection Group and the type of Protection trip.
SINGLE SHOT RESET TIMER
This timer starts when the ACR is closed manually and runs for the
preset number of seconds, see PROTECTION SETTING 2 (A...J):SS
Reset Time 1s.
Single Shot Tripping remains active while the timer is counting. If a
protection pickup occurs whilst timing, the timer is reset to zero and
held there while pickup is active. A protection pickup reset will restart
the timer. A protection trip will result in a lockout without reclosing. The
time to trip setting may be longer than the Single Shot Reset Time.
Single Shot Tripping may be disabled by setting the Single Shot Reset
Time to zero. When set to zero, auto reclosing will always be enabled
while the operator command SYSTEM STATUS-OPERATOR
SETTINGS 1:Auto Reclose ON is set. This means that Single Shot Mode
does not activate after an operator or automation close command.
Work Tag Tripping
When work is being done on a network you may apply a Work Tag to
the ACR. In some countries Work Tag is called Hot Line Tag. When
Work Tag is applied special Work Tag protection settings are active and
the ACR is in Single Shot Mode. Typically Work Tag protection settings
will cause a fast trip with no auto reclosing if a fault is detected while the
work tag is applied.
Work Tag Mode has its own protection settings. The user can configure
Work Tag settings for OC, EF, SEF and NPS protection in the same
manner as for Trips 1, 2, 3 and 4.
1. The ACR can be closed or Auto Reclose can be turned on/off by a number of sources
(from the Control Panel, by a telemetry command, by WSOS5 command or by IOEX
command). Single Shot is activated/de-activated irrespective of the source of the control.
Protection Features
8-31
Trip Flags Trip Flag Display Page
This is the first System Status page (default) to appear when the panel
is turned on.
The display identifies each protection element that may cause a trip and
next to it a box.
If that particular element caused the most recent protection trip then the
box will be filled i.e. .
The following display is a typical example of this page which indicates
that the most recent trip was caused by an Instantaneous Overcurrent
(OC) fault between phases A and B. There has been a total of three
overcurrent events.
The counter beside the Earth Fault (EF) element shows that at some
time previously there has been a single occurrence of an EF trip. In this
case any instantaneous indication for EF would have reset when the
ACR tripped on O/C protection.
The counter next to the status indicator shows the number of times
each protection element has caused a trip. Each counter has a range of
01 to 99 (cannot count past 99).
Some elements display the letters A, B, C to identify the phase.
Some elements also display the letter I to identify instantaneous trips.
An Operator Trip does not alter the
flags.
The Trip Flags page field descriptions are shown below:
The setting of SYSTEM STATUS-OPERATOR SETTINGS 1:
Protection OFF displays Pickup Flags instead of Trip Flags and more
than one element may be set at a time.
Resetting theTrip Flags
The Trip Flags will be reset by:
Any operator close, including remote control commands.
Start of a new sequence.
- - - - - - - - - - - - TRIP FLAGS - - - - - - - - - - - - s
O/C 03 AB I LOP 00 Ext 00
E/F 01 FRQ 00
SEF 00 NPS 00O OPS 0001
Field Description
O/C Phase Overcurrent The phase or phases faulted are identified by
letter: A, B, C. The letter I indicates instataneous
trip.
E/F Earth Fault As for O/C
SEF Sensitive Earth Fault This field is not displayed when SEF is
unavailable.
LOP Loss of Phase The phase or phases lost are identified by letter: A,
B, C.
FRQ Frequency Fault Indicates both under and over frequency
conditions.
NPS Negative Phase
Sequence
Overcurrent
The letter I indicates instataneous trip.
EXT External Trip External trip sources. A trip caused by the
activation of an FTIM or an IOEX protection trip
input.
OPS Operations Counter The OPS field indicates the total number of trip/
close operations performed by the ACR.
Table 6: Trip Flags - field descriptions
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-32
The Trip Flags and counters will be reset by:
Pressing a Quick Key configured as Reset Flags twice within a ten
second period.
Turning Protection OFF, however the flags and counters will not
appear until Protection is turned ON.
Pressing the SELECT key twice within a ten second period whilst
the Trip Flags screen is displayed.
On the first press of the SELECT key the following display advises the
operator what to do next

Inrush Restraint When closing onto a typical load there is a transient increase in current
caused by such loads as :
magnetizing current in transformers
starting current of motors
startup current of incandescent and arc lights
The ADVC protection firmware filters
out harmonics so that the overcurrent
protection elements only respond to the
fundamental frequency. This is
different to the operation of the Nu-Lec
PTCC. Therefore optimum Inrush
Restraint settings for the ADVC may be
different to those for the PTCC
because transformer magnetizing
current harmonics will not affect ADVC
protection elements.
This transient current is called Inrush Current, and may cause
overcurrent protection to operate.
The purpose of Inrush Restraint is to prevent the ACR from tripping
when inrush current occurs. Inrush Restraint works by raising the
Pickup Currents for phase, NPS and Earth overcurrent protection for a
short period of time while the inrush current is flowing. The user sets
the Inrush Current Multiplier and the Inrush Time.
Inrush Restraint is activated whenever the current through the ACR
goes to zero. This will happen if the ACR opens, or if an upstream or
downstream device opens.
Typical Inrush Restraint settings are:
Inrush Current Multiplier : 4
Inrush Time : 200 ms
ANSI Device Numbers
- - - - - - - - - - RESET TRIP FLAGS - - - - - - - - - -S
Press the key again to reset the flags.
Press the menu key to cancel.
ANSI
Device
#
ADVC Protection
Element
ANSI Device Description
12 OVERSPEED RELAY
14 UNDERSPEED RELAY
21 DISTANCE RELAY
24 OVEREXCITATION
RELAY
Functions with time delay (inverse, step or
definite time) for overexcitation conditions as
evidenced by Volts/Hertz.
25 SYNC-CHECK RELAY Functions when two ac circuits are within
desired limits of frequency, phase angle and
voltage to permit the paralleling of these two
circuits.
25A AUTOMATIC
SYNCHRONIZING
RELAY
Acts to bring two ac circuits within desired
limits of frequency, phase angle and voltage,
then initiates the paralleling of these two
circuits.
26 OVERTEMPERATURE
RELAY
Protection Features
8-33
27 UNDERVOLTAGE
RELAY
Functions on a given value of undervoltage.
27N GROUND FAULT
UNDERVOLTAGE
RELAY
Functions on a given value of third harmonic
undervoltage.
32 POWER RELAY Functions on a desired value of power flow in
a given direction.
37 UNDERCURRENT
RELAY
Functions on a given value of undercurrent.
40 LOSS OF FIELD RELAY Functions on a given value of dc field current.
46 PHASE BALANCE
CURRENT RELAY
Functions on a given degree of unbalance
between the polyphase currents.
46N NEGATIVE SEQUENCE
OVERCURRENT
Functions when the polyphase currents
contain negative sequence components
above a given value.
47 PHASE SEQUENCE
VOLTAGE RELAY
Functions on a given value of polyphase
voltage in the desired phase sequence.
47N NEGATIVE SEQUENCE
VOLTAGE RELAY
Functions on a given value of the negative
sequence component of the polyphase
voltage.
49 THERMAL RELAY Functions when the temperature of a
machine, transformer or other load-carrying
winding exceeds a given value.
50 INSTANTANEOUS
OVERCURRENT RELAY
Functions without intentional time delay
when the current exceeds a given value.
50BF BREAKER FAILURE
RELAY
Functions when current continues to flow
after the monitored breaker should have
interrupted a fault.
51 TIME OVERCURRENT
RELAY
Functions with a definite or inverse time
characteristic when the current exceeds a
given value.
51/27C VOLTAGE
CONTROLLED TIME
OVERCURRENT RELAY
A time overcurrent relay whose pickup is
adjusted by an undervoltage function.
51/27R VOLTAGE RESTRAINED
TIME OVERCURRENT
RELAY
A time overcurrent relay whose pickup is
adjusted by an undervoltage function.
59 OVERVOLTAGE RELAY Functions as a given value of overvoltage.
59N GROUND FAULT
OVERVOLTAGE RELAY
Functions on a given value of Overvoltage at
the fundamental frequency.
60 VOLTAGE BALANCE
RELAY
Functions on a quantitative voltage
difference between two circuits.
67 AC DIRECTIONAL
OVERCURRENT RELAY
Functions on a desired value of ac
overcurrent flowing in a predetermined
direction.
78 PHASE ANGE RELAY
79 AC RECLOSING RELAY Controls the automatic reclosing and locking
out of an ac circuit interrupter.
ANSI
Device
#
ADVC Protection
Element
ANSI Device Description
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
8-34
81 FREQUENCY RELAY Functions on a predetermined value of
frequency (either under or over or on normal
system frequency) or rate of change of
frequency.
87 DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTIVE RELAY
Functions on a percentage or phase angle or
other quantitative difference of two currents
or of some other electrical quantities.
ANSI
Device
#
ADVC Protection
Element
ANSI Device Description
Power System Measurement
9-1
9 Power System Measurement
Introduction The ADVC measures up to 10 power system components:
A, B, and C phase currents, and CT spill (earth/ground) current,
phase to earth/ground voltage on all six terminals.
For more information about how to view the above measurements from
the OCI, see Operator Control Panel on page 5-1.
The ADVC uses the above measurements to derive many system
measurements including:
frequency,
phase to phase voltages,
total and per phase power (kW, kVA, kVAR),
total and per phase power factor,
harmonic, voltages and currents
earth current, and
sequence components.
In addition the ADVC also measures several internal values such as:
CAPE temperature,
switchgear temperature
1
(N-Series, U-Series ACRs only)
auxiliary voltage,
gas pressure (N-Series ACR only),
battery voltage.
Navigation All system measurement pages are contained within the Measurement
display group.
Daily, Weekly, Monthly Demand The ADVC maintains a log of three sets of demand records that show
total power (kWh) for the previous day, week and month. In addition it
also logs the interval and value of the peak real power and power factor
for the demand period.
The ADVC maintains approximately six years of daily, weekly and
monthly data. When the log is full, the oldest record is deleted as the
newest is added.
The sample period of the three demand logs is configurable to be 5, 15,
30 and 60 minutes. All values are averaged over this period. The
1. The ADVC measures the temperature of the SCEM in the ACR and from that,
calculates the switchgear temperature.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
9-2
sample period can be set at SYSTEM STATUS - OPERATOR
SETTINGS 2 page.
Logging begins on the hour, or on intervals past the hour. For example,
if 15 minute sample period is selected at 12 minutes past the hour then
averaging begins at 15 minutes past the hour and data is stored at 30
minutes past the hour.
If the sample period is changed then the new sample period data will be
added to any existing data for that demand period. When the demand
record is stored it will consequently look at all data for that period
irrespective of sample period.
The ADVC can be set to have power as a signed or unsigned quantity
at SYSTEM STATUS - PHASE VOLTAGE AND POWER FLOW . Total
power flow (kWh) logged during the demand period will show either the
net energy flow (i.e. zero if equal energy had flowed both ways) or total
power flow irrespective of the direction depending on the signed/
unsigned power setting.
Below is an example daily maximum demand screen:
In the above example, assume the sample period has been set to 15
minutes. It can therefore be seen that the total power flow for the day
ending midnight 1 April 2004 was 28565 kWh. The peak 15 minute
average consumption was 1235kW with power factor 0.97. The peak
occurred during the period 17:00:00 to 17:14:59 inclusive.
The weekly and monthly demand screens follow the same format as the
daily demand shown above.
To view other demand records press the SELECT key and then either
the left or right arrow keys until desired record is seen. To return to the
most recent record press the MENU key.
Configurable History The ADVC maintains a history log of user selectable data.
The number of data types collected and the log sample period can be
selected via the WSOS5 History - Configurable History window seen at
left. The history log cannot be viewed or configured via the panel.
The log sample period can be set to 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120, 360, 480,
720 or 1440 minutes.
Logging begins at the real time multiple of the sample period selected.
For example, if 15 minutes sample period is selected at 12 minutes past
the hour then averaging starts at 15 minutes past the hour and the first
data stored is at 30 minutes past the hour.
The following formula shows the estimated time before oldest data is
overwritten by newest data:
The historical data can be saved to a text file or to a csv file using
WSOS5. Refer to the WSOS5 help file for more information.
- - - - - - - - DAILY MAXIMUM DEMAND- - - - - - - - M
Day ending 1/04/2004 Total 28565kWh
Peak period 1/04/2004 17:14:59
Peak demand 1235kW 0.97PF
Estimated time =
(9 + number of data selections)
log period x 360448
Communications
10-1
10 Communications
Communication Interface Introduction
The controller has eight communications ports, for which you can
configure:
the selection of active communication ports,
the set up of each port,
the communication protocol that uses each port, and
the settings for the protocol itself.
For information about port pin outs, refer to the installation and
maintenance manual.
Enabling/Disabling Communication Ports
The eight communication ports are:
Due to hardware restrictions not all
selectable ports can be active. At any
one time, you may configure as
ENABLED up to a maximum of three of
the ports identified as selectable in the
above table.
Enabling and disabling of ports can only be performed using WSOS5
using the Switchgear Communications dialogue.
For more information, refer to the WSOS5 help file.
Port Details
RS232
Four RS232 ports (A to D) are provided to connect to conventional
modems that provide the correct signalling for the communications
network used, e.g. optical fibre modem, or telephone dial up modem, or
RS232 radio modem. All four ports have a baud rate of 57600 bits per
second. All four ports have standard 9 pin D male connectors and have
the following pin connections:.
Port Label Port Type
Configuration
Status
Comment
Port A RS-232 Selectable Default for WSOS5 (57.6kBaud, 8 bit,
no parity, 1 start/stop bit)
No hardware handshake lines.
Port B RS-232 Selectable No hardware handshake lines.
Port C RS-232 Selectable RTS CTS DTR CD
Port D RS-232 Permanent RTS CTS DTR CD
Port E RS-232 Permanent Dedicated for use by OCI.
No hardware handshake lines.
RS-485 RS-485 Selectable
V23 FSK Selectable Supports BUSY and PTT
handshaking
10BASE-T Ethernet Permanent
Table 7: Communication Ports
RS232
Pin No
Direction Use
Port
A B C D
1 To ADVC Data Carrier Detect
(DCD)
Yes Yes
2 To ADVC Rx Data (RxD) Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 From ADVC Tx Data (TxD) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Table 8: RS232 Pin Connections
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
10-2
All RS-232 ports are not isolated from one another or from the controller
electronics. They therefore can only be connected to devices inside the
controller that are powered by the controller radio supply, including
modems, optical isolators, and radios.
Use of serial ports to connect
directly to other devices outside the
controller can cause damage and
void warranty. If connections to
other devices are required then
isolation interfaces MUST be used.
RS485
An RS485 port has been provided to enable higher speed (115kbits per
second) multi-drop connections that often occur within substations. The
RS-485 port is a female RJ45 connector.

V23 FSK
Levels in excess of 13V should not
be applied. The FET is rated for a
maximum of +32V and negative
voltages are not permitted.
Transmit and receive are unbalanced
signals relative to 0 volts and are not
isolated. If a DC level is imposed by
the radio on the transmit line then
this should be less than 2.5 VDC.
An in-built FSK modem provides half duplex V23 signalling at 1200 bits
per second. This interface is primarily designed for use with voice
frequency radio systems and provides additional signals for this
purpose.
The V23 connector is RJ45.:
4 From ADVC Data Terminal ready
(DTR)
Yes Yes
5
0V (ground/earth)
Yes Yes Yes Yes
6 Not connected
7 From ADVC Request to Send (RTS) Yes Yes
8 To ADVC Clear to Send (CTS) Yes Yes
9 Reserved Yes
RS232
Pin No
Direction Use
Port
A B C D
Table 8: RS232 Pin Connections
Pin Use
1 Not connected 6 Transmit
2 Receive 7 Not connected
3 Not connected 8 Transmit
4 Receive 9 Ground
5 Not connected
Table 9: RS485 Pin Connections
Pin Direction Use
1 To ADVC Receive, 10 kOhm impedance. Sensitivity 0.1 2V pk-pk
2 0 Volts (ground/earth)
3 Not connected
4 To ADVC CD, 5 kOhm impedance
5 Not connected
6 From ADVC Transmit, 600 Ohm impedance. Level 2.5V pk-pk
7 Not connected
8 From CAPM Press to talk (PTT)
9 Shield
Table 10: V23 Pin Connections
Communications
10-3
The Press to Talk (PTT) signal is used to key up a radio transmitter. PTT
is implemented using a Field Effect Transistor (FET) with an on
resistance of 3.3 ohm. When PTT is asserted the transistor is turned on
and connects the PTT signal to 0V.
A busy signal can be provided by the radio to indicate receive channel
busy. High level is +3.5 to +5V, low level 0V to +0.5V. The busy signal
should be driven by an open collector output or current limited to
10 mA.
If multiple ACRs are in use in a substation application they can be
connected to a single radio using the 600ohm line isolator accessory
available from the manufacturer.
ETHERNET
The controller has a 10 base T Ethernet port with a baud rate of 10Mbits
per second. The port is a RJ45 female connector.
If the controller is connected to a
LAN or WAN then it is strongly
recommended that:
1.Firewalls be used to limit user
access to the controller
2.Ethernet switches be used to limit
the volume of Ethernet data
reaching the controller's 10Base-T
port. (Use of Ethernet hubs is not
recommended.)
ADVC Control Cubicle External Port
Beneath the OCI covered by the ADVC hatch, there is a DB9
communications port, labelled Maintenance Port. This port is a cabled
extension to the ADVC RS232 Port-A and is provided as a convenient
local communications access to the ADVC without having to open the
cubicle door.
Communication Display Group Navigation
The communication display group is one of the main display groups.
See your ACR Installation and Maintenance Guide for an explanation of
display groups.
Navigation within the communication menu is shown at left
This is an example of a typical Communications group main page:
See Appendix M (page M-1) for details of all Communications Group
pages.
It can be seen in the above example that:
WSOS5 communications can be performed via RS232 Port A,
SCADA protocol DNP3 has been made available and is
communicating via port C,
the communication trace feature has been made available and is
currently inactive, and
IOEX support has been made available and is currently not
configured to communicate via any port.
NAVIGATING TO A PORT SETUP PAGE
Whilst on the main COMMUNICATIONS SETUP screen, press the
SELECT key once, press the left or right arrow keys until the desired
port is displayed then press the ENTER key to display the port's settings.
Subsequent left & right arrow key presses display more settings pages
- - - - - - - - - COMMUNICATIONS SETUP- - - - - - - - C
Configure Ports WSOS Port RS232-A
DNP3 Port RS232-C Trace Port NONE
IOEX Port NONE
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
10-4
and pressing the MENU key at any time returns to the main
communications set up screen.
A typical RS232 communication port set up screen is shown below:
It can be seen in the above example that Port A is set up as follows:
it has been ENABLED to transmit/receive messages,
it has no port driver support,
it is operating at 57600 baud, 8 bit, no parity, 1 stop bit,
it is a LOCAL mode port.
NAVIGATING TO A COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
Whilst on the main COMMUNICATIONS SETUP screen, press the
SELECT key until the desired protocol begins flashing and then press
the ENTER key to display the protocol's settings. Subsequent left or right
arrow key presses display more settings, and pressing the MENU key at
any time returns to the main communication set up screen.
A typical protocol application first screen can be seen in the example
below:
It can be seen in the above example that:
the WSOS5 protocol used to communicate with WSOS5 has been
configured to communicate using Port A,
the application is running i.e. no other application has excluded it
from controlling the port,
the WSOS5 change of state feature is currently OFF.
For SCADA protocol applications refer to the relevant manual for more
information.
Configuring RS-232 Port Settings The controller has five RS232 Ports - A, B, C, D, and E (panel).
RS-232 Configuration Settings
A number of settings can be configured for each RS232 port. The
settings are located across four pages which are numbered 1 through 4.
An example of each page is shown below.
Complete details of these settings are given at RS232 Communication
Port Settings on page H-1.
- - - - - - - - - - - RS232-PORT-A 1 - - - - - - - - - - C
ENABLED Baud 57600
Driver None Parity None
Mode LOCAL Stop Bits 1
- - - - - - - - - WSOS COMMUNICATIONS - - - - - - - - C
Port RS232-A RUNNING
Change-of-State OFF
- - - - - - - - - - - RS232-PORT-C 1 - - - - - - - - - - C
ENABLED Baud 57600
Driver None Parity None
Mode LOCAL Stop Bits 1
- - - - - - - - - - - RS232-PORT-C 2 - - - - - - - - - - C
RTS DISABLED Pre-Tx 250ms
CTS Ignore Post-Tx 35ms
DTR DISABLED
Communications
10-5
RS232 Transmission of a data packet
The following is a typical RS232 communications behaviour for
communication with a radio modem. Requires RTS ENABLED and CTS
Don't Ignore settings.
1 RTS line is asserted
2 Controller waits until the pre-transmission (Pre-Tx) delay expires
and checks that CTS has been asserted.
3 The preamble is transmitted (optional).
4 Checks CTS is still asserted.
5 The packet is transmitted
6 Waits until the post-transmission (Post-Tx) delay expires.
7 RTS is negated
RDI Modem Support
The controller can support connection to a device that uses the RDI
protocol. The RDI driver is used to interface to the EDACS radio system
used in some parts of USA.
RDI is both a physical and a logical flow control protocol and is
proprietary to M/A-COM Private Radio Systems. For the physical
interface it requires RX TX, RTS, GND, and may optionally use CTS.
The operation is such that a packet of data generated by a protocol (eg
DNP3) is wrapped in RDI control data and transmitted out of the
physical port. The RDI device to which the controller is connected must
acknowledge each transmitted packet. An optional additional
acknowledgement (ACK2) may be used to verify end-to-end data
transfer (i.e. from EDACS radio to EDACS radio). The CTS signal is
used along with the ACK2 to indicate the success or failure of the data
transmission.
Any protocol using the RDI protocol must allow sufficient time between
retries to allow the RDI protocol to exhaust all transmission attempts.
Data received by the controller from the RDI device is acknowledged if
it is valid, stripped of the RDI data, and passed on to the protocol that is
attached to the port.
Complete details of the settings shown in the following Communications
Display Group screens are given at RDI Modem Support Settings on
page H-3.
- - - - - - - - - - - RS232-PORT-C 3 - - - - - - - - - - C
DCD Ignore CA Delay 1000ms
- - - - - - - - - - - RS232-PORT-C 4 - - - - - - - - - - C
Preamble DISABLED First Char 0x55
Repeat First 3 Last Char 0xFF
- - - - - - - - - - RDI Communications - - - - - - - - C
MSG Attempts 4
ACK2 ON
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
10-6
All of the above counters are zeroed when:
the controller is reset;
Any field can be cleared via the
operator control panel by selecting it
and pressing either the left or right keys.
the RDI driver is selected/deselected;
an RDI configuration parameter is changed; or
the Reset All button is selected in WSOS5 RDI dialog.
All communication statistic parameters are not password protected.
Configuring RS-485 Port Settings Complete details of the RS-485 configuration settings are given at
RS485 Communication Port Settings. on page H-3.
Configuring V23 FSK Port Settings Signal frequencies conform to V23 standard.
The controller only supports half duplex (i.e. receive and transmit can
not occur at the same time) when using the V23 port.
V23 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
Complete details of theV23 FSK configuration settings are given at
V23 FSK Port Settings on page H-4.
Carrier Detect and Busy work in an
'either/or' relationship with respect to
collision avoidance i.e. if Busy Don't
Ignore and CD ENABLED then either a
BUSY state or CARRIER DETECTED
blocks V23 transmissions and the CA
Delay mechanism is invoked.
Configuring 10Base-T Port
Settings
Complete details of the 10Base-T configuration settings are given at
10Base-T Port Settings on page H-5.
- - - - - - - - - - RDI Communications - - - - - - - - C
ACK0 Err Cnt 0
ACK1 Err Cnt 0
ACK2 Err Cnt 0
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - RS485-1 - - - - - - - - - - - - C
ENABLED Baud 57600
Mode LOCAL Parity NONE
- - - - - - - - - - - - - V23 - FSK 1 - - - - - - - - - - - C
ENABLED Baud 1200
Mode REMOTE Parity NONE
- - - - - - - - - - - - - V23 - FSK 2 - - - - - - - - - - - C
CD DISABLED Pre-Tx 250ms
CD if input low Post-Tx 35ms
Busy Dont Ignore CA Delay 1000ms
- - - - - - - - - - - - - V23 - FSK 2 - - - - - - - - - - - C
Preamble DISABLED First Char 0x55
Repeat First 3 Last Char 0x55
Communications
10-7
Communications Diagnostic
Feature
When commissioning or troubleshooting a SCADA communication links
it is often necessary to capture and /or monitor communication
channels to aid in problem resolution and to confirm correct operation.
When combined with an external capture facility, the controller has a
useful feature that allows viewing and/or capturing of SCADA
communications.
The communications diagnostic feature has three major modes of
operation:
Communications Trace Mode.
Communications Loop-Back Mode.
Communications Capture Mode.
The Trace and Loop-back modes are accessed and controlled via
the operator control panel page COMMUNICATIONS TRACE 1. The
Communications Capture mode and traced message stream is
controlled and captured by WSOS5.
Communication Trace
Typical operator configuration for communications Trace:
All data bytes received and transmitted on the target port are copied
and then transmitted through the output port. The output port data can
be viewed and/or captured using a PC running third party software such
as Hyper-terminal.
Traced messages can optionally have a date, time, port, driver,
application, Tx/Rx indicator and data length, and header prefixed when
the Fmt field is set to ASCII-HEX or HEADER BINARY.
With Fmt set to ASCII-HEX, the End of Line field setting controls the
character(s) that are placed at either end of the prefixed header which
is enclosed in the < > character pair. The body of the traced message is
transformed into ASCII two character per byte human readable format.
The trace output port physical attributes
are controlled by the
COMMUNICATIONS SETUP Configure
Ports setting.
For example:
(End of Line' character(s))
<10/03/04 16:03:21.537,RS485,NONE,DNP3,Tx,10>(End of Line'
character(s))
05 64 05 40 03 00 05 00 C8 CD (End of Line character(s))
<10/03/04 16:03:21.929,RS485,NONE,Rx,10>(End of Line'
character(s))
05 64 05 80 05 00 03 00 AB A4
COMMUNICATION LOOP-BACK
Typical operator configuration for communications Loop-back:
- - - - - - - - - - - - - 10Base-T 1 - - - - - - - - - - - C
ENABLED IP 10.176.20.101
Mode REMOTE Subnet 255.255.0.0
DHCP OFF
Controller
SCADA
Protocol
SCADA Master
SCADA
Protocol
Handler
Comms
Trace
Application
Target
Port
Output
Port
PC
Trace
Output
3rd party
software
- - - - - - - - -Communications Trace 1 - - - - - - - C
Output RS232-A RUNNING
Target RS485 Timeout 15 Min
Fmt ASCII-HEX End of Line CR/LF
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
10-8
The Output and Target fields are set to the same port, which creates a
software loop back within the controller. Any SCADA messages
received on the Target/Output port are reflected as a transmitted
message.
Only ports that are available and in an
ENABLED state (See Configuring RS-
232 Port Settings on page 10-4) are
shown in the Output field, i.e. other
'protocols/applications that are active
and have the desired Output port
selected need to be turned OFF or
select another port to make the desired
output port available for the
communications diagnostic.
The Fmt field will display 'RAW LOOPBACK' which is the only format
supported within 'Loop-back' mode.
The End of Line field setting has no effect.
COMMUNICATIONS CAPTURE
Typical operator configuration for communications Capture:
Communications Capture mode is controlled entirely via WSOS5.
All data bytes received and transmitted on the Target port is captured by
the WSOS5 communication capture tool.
In this mode, WSOS5 overrides the following settings:
Output port setting is overridden to be WSOS5
Target port is selected via WSOS5.
Format (Fmt) setting is overridden to be HEADER BINARY (reverts
to previous setting at end of WSOS5 capture session).
The COMMUNICATION TRACE 1 panel page fields become status
display only and the Timeout and End of Line fields have no effect.
COMMUNICATIONS TRACE SETTINGS
See Communications Trace Settings on page H-6 for details of these
settings.
- - - - - - - - -Communications Trace 1 - - - - - - - C
Output RS232-C RUNNING
Target RS232-C Timeout 15 Min
Fmt RAW LOOPBACK End of Line CR/LF
Controller
SCADA
Protocol
SCADA Master
Comms
Diagnostic
Application Target/Output
Port
Controller
SCADA
Protocol
SCADA Master
SCADA
Protocol
Handler Target
Port
Output
Port(RS232-A)
PC
Trace
Output
(RS485)
Communications
Diagnostic and
SOS
Application
WSOS5
- - - - - - - - -Communications Trace 1 - - - - - - - C
Output WSOS RUNNING
Target RS485 Timeout 15 Min
Fmt HEADER BINARY End of Line CR/LF
- - - - - - - - -Communications Trace 1 - - - - - - - C
Output NONE INACTIVE
Target NONE Timeout 15 Min
Fmt HEADER BINARY End of Line CR/LF
- - - - - - - - -Communications Trace 2 - - - - - - - C
Tx Count 0 Rx Count 0
Tx Bytes 0 Rx Bytes 0
Communications
10-9
EXAMPLE COMMUNICATIONS CAPTURE
Figure 11 (page 10-9) shows a typical WSOS5 communications capture
display.
WSOS5 CONTROLLED MODE OPERATION
In order for WSOS5 to successfully capture the controller's SCADA
protocol messages, the following rules must be applied:
WSOS5 cannot capture communications on the controller's port
upon which it is communicating.
WSOS5 must be connected to the controller via Direct, Modem
or IP.
The WSOS5 connection speed must be greater than the SCADA
protocol speed. The table below gives examples of valid connection
methods.
When off-line, the Start and Stop buttons are disabled. When on-
line the Start and Stop buttons are enabled/disabled depending
on the operating mode. A valid port to monitor must be selected
before pressing the start button. After the start button is pressed, the
screen can be closed and the capturing will continue for the time
period selected. Other screens can be displayed and values
changed etc. The stop button, when enabled, can be pressed to
stop the capturing. The communications capture file can be included
as part of the export file.
Clicking the right mouse button on the grid displays a menu of options.
WSOS5
connection
SCADA protocol to monitor Valid
Direct 57600 Direct 9600 Yes
Direct 57600 Direct 19200 Yes
Direct 57600 Direct 57600 Yes
Direct 57600 Modem 1200 baud Yes
Direct 57600 Modem 9600 baud Yes
Direct 57600 Modem 19200 baud Yes
Direct 57600 V23 (1200 baud) Yes
Modem 9600 Direct 9600 Yes
Modem 19200 Direct 19200 Yes
Modem 57600 Direct 57600 No
Figure 11: Communications Capture
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
10-10
Power Quality Measurement
11-1
11 Power Quality Measurement
Power Quality Tool Kit Utilities are coming under increasing pressure from both customers and
regulatory bodies alike to review the quality of power they are providing.
This involves monitoring of their networks for various indices such as
number of and duration of outages, sag/surge voltages and system
harmonics.
The ADVC takes advantage of its ACRs built in current and voltage
sensors to provide power-monitoring abilities to meet the benchmark
needs without the need for highly priced specialised monitoring
instruments that require expensive additional current and voltage
transformers.
Together, these ADVC abilities comprise the Power Quality Tool Kit.
The power quality tool kit consists of three components:
Supply Outage Measurement
Harmonic Analysis
Disturbance Waveform Capture
Supply Outage Monitoring Introduction
Many utilities analyse their network outages to measure the supply
reliability to their customers. The average duration and frequency of
outages are key indicators in this process and they are commonly
defined as:
System Average Interruption Duration Index (SAIDI). This is equal to
the average minutes lost per customer per year. Each utility has its own
definition of lost customer minutes. For example, it may not include
outages of one minute or less or outages resulting form transmission
grid failure or major storms.
System Average Interruption Frequency Index (SAIFI). This is equal to
the average number of outages per customer per year. Each utility may
define an outage in a different way.
The Supply Outage Measurement feature utilises built in recloser
features to record the number and duration of outages. These statistics
are recorded in the ADVC and are available to the utility to help
calculate SAIDI and SAIFI. The ADVC records the:
Cumulative total number of outages,
Cumulative total outage duration, and
The time and duration of each outage event in the Event log
Determination of Supply Outage
The ADVC monitors the ACR terminal voltages to determine when
there is an outage. A loss of supply voltage on one or more phases for a
user-set time is defined as the start of the outage and when voltage is
restored to all three phases for the same user-set time, the end of the
outage has been reached. The reported outage duration is the actual
time without voltage.The ADVC logs:
the number of,
the total duration of, and
the start and finish times,
of each outage on the network segment on either side of the ACR.
When an outage is detected on one side it is timed and the data is
recorded.
If the ACR is disconnected from the ADVC or the ADVC is powered
down during an outage then it cannot determine the outage duration. In
such cases the outage duration data for that specific outage is
discarded. The outage counter is maintained.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
11-2
Configuration
-
Harmonic Analysis Many utilities are finding that the nature of their electricity network load
is changing as an increasing number of distorting devices are attached
to it. Typical sources of waveform distortion include variable speed
drives, personal computer power supplies, uninterruptible power
supplies, fluorescent lamp ballasts, and transformer excitation currents.
Simultaneously with the increased level of waveform distorting sources
there is also an increasing quantity of advanced electronic equipment
that is sensitive to waveform purity of the power it receives. Examples
of such equipment include personal computers; modern home
electronic equipment such as televisions, audio and visual
entertainment devices, dishwashers, washing machines, microwaves,
etc.; and sensitive industrial control and instrumentation equipment.
To complicate things further, high levels of distortion can also lead to
increased line losses and transmission equipment burn out which
means increased utility equipment costs.
Utilities are therefore finding it necessary to analyse their network
currents and voltages to detect the level of waveform distortion. The
index for distortion most commonly used is harmonics. In addition to
monitoring the harmonics themselves a Total Harmonic Distortion
(THD) value can be calculated. THD is a relative value of all harmonics
with respect to the fundamental that is expressed as a percentage.
The advanced controller calculates harmonics 2 to 16 and THD over a
80ms period for 4 currents (3 x phase + earth/ground), 6 phase - phase
voltages and 6 phase-earth/ground voltages. Each harmonic and the
THD is averaged for a moving 2 second window, updated every 500ms.
Setting Description
Measure Outages
OFF
ON
Measure Outages
This setting indicates whether measure outages has been
enabled or disabled.
Password protected setting.
Range: OFF, ON
Factory default is OFF
Outage Duration Outage Duration
Minimum time for terminals to be without voltage to be
counted as supply outage. Also used as the minimum time
for restored voltage before an outage is considered finished.
Range: 1 to 3600 seconds
Factory default is 60 seconds
Source Outages Source Outages
Number of supply outages on the source terminals.
(Display only setting)
Load Outages Load Outages
Number of supply outages on the load terminals.
(Display only setting)
Duration Duration
Total duration of supply outages in hours, minutes, and
seconds for both source and load side terminals.
Range: 0 h 0 m 0 s to 9999 h 99 m 99 s.
(Display only setting)
- - - - - - - - - - Supply Outages - - - - - - - - - - M
Measure Outages ON Out. Duration 60s
Source Outages 0 Duration 0h 0m 0s
Load Outages 0 Duration 0h 0m 0s
The outage counter data can be reset
by pressing the SELECT key until the
desired field starts flashing, press
either the left or right arrow key, and
then press the Enter key.
Power Quality Measurement
11-3
Determination of Harmonics Alarms
The ADVC harmonics and THD values can be viewed in graphical form
in WSOS5 as shown in Figure 12 (page 11-3).

Logging of Harmonics Alarms
In addition to calculating and displaying the harmonics, the ADVC also
reports by exception in its event log when any individual harmonic
exceeds a user-set threshold for a user-set time. The event records the
harmonic, the peak% value and a time stamp. To indicate the duration
of the harmonic, another event is logged when the harmonic drops
below the threshold for two seconds. A threshold setting of zero will
disable recording for that harmonic. Both the user-set, threshold value
and user-set time can be set only via WSOS5. Refer to the WSOS5
help file for more information.
An example harmonic event logging is shown below
Historical Data Logging of Harmonics
If long term monitoring of harmonic values is required then the
harmonic averages data type can be selected for logging along with the
log sample period, using the ADVC configurable history feature. Refer
to Configurable History on page 9-2.
Figure 12: WSOS5 Harmonics Screen
------------------ EVENT LOG ---------------E Comment
01/03/05 15:22:24.27 Vxca:THD 10.0% At 3:22:24.27pm on 1st March 2005
the X side Vca total harmonic
distortion reached 10%.
07/03/05 5:22:26.36 Ia:5H 13.2% At 5:22:26.36am on 7th March 2005
the A phase current 5th total
harmonic distortion reached 13.2%.
01/04/05 12:24:28.63 Vxca:THD OFF At 12:24:28.63pm on 1st April 2005
the X side Vca total harmonic
distortion dropped below its threshold
for 2 seconds.
05/05/05 17:34:12.66 Viab:16H OFF At 17:34:12.66pm on 5th May 2005
the I side Vab 16th harmonic dropped
below its threshold for 2 seconds.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
11-4
Waveform Capture The ability to capture and view system current and voltage waveform
data of an electrical network system in oscilloscope format is an integral
part of any power quality analysis. The power quality tool kit has a
feature that enables capture of the raw input data (3200 samples per
second) as presented to the electronics by the A/D converters. The
scaled raw data includes the three phase currents, earth current, six
phase-earth/ground voltages and six phase-phase voltages.
The total recording time, the proportioning of the total recording to pre-
trigger or post-trigger recording and the events that trigger the recording
are user configurable from both the OCI and WSOS5.
The captured data can be retrieved later in COMTRADE (IEEE Std
C37.111-1999) format using WSOS5. WSOS5 has the ability to display
the data in waveform and vector formats.
The data captured is raw A/D data and
hence will show noise as seen by the
electronics prior to software filtering.
This noise will often be seen in captured
data especially on inputs that do not
have anything connected and/or have
poor earthing.
For more information about the WSOS5 waveform data retrieval and
viewing capabilities refer to the WSOS5 help file.
Configuration
Figure 13: WSOS5 Currents Waveform Capture Display - Manual Trip
Setting Description
Wave Capture Waveform Capture ON/OFF Control
Enables or disables waveform capture triggering.
Range: OFF, ON
Factory default is OFF
- - - - - - - - - -Waveform Capture - - - - - - - - - M
Wave Capture ON W/C Window 1s
W/C Ratio 50/50 Capture Now OFF
Power Quality Measurement
11-5
-
The timing of the trigger is from the internal controller request signal eg
OCPM Trip Request seen in Event Log. The accuracy of the pre and
post trigger ratio is therefore subject to minor software variances plus
the operating time of the switchgear.
If a second trigger becomes active while a waveform capture is in
progress, it will be ignored.
Waveform Replay
Once a waveform has been captured and the data processed by the
ADVC, it can be read by WSOS5 and stored on the PC as a
COMTRADE file.
All captured waveform data that is read and stored by WSOS5 can be
replayed through the ADVC in order to emulate the network conditions.
This enables analysis of ADVC behaviour for certain conditions.
For more information about the WSOS5 waveform replay capabilities
refer the WSOS5 help file.
W/C Window Waveform Capture Recording Window
The total time window during which data is recorded per
waveform capture.
The number of capture events that the controller can capture is
directly related to the size of the capture window:
- 0.5 seconds allows 32 capture events
- 1.0 seconds allows 16 capture events
- 2.0 seconds allows 8 capture events
When the capture event buffer is full, a new capture event will
overwrite the oldest capture event.
Range: 0.5s, 1.0s, 2.0s
Factory Default is 1.0 seconds
W/C Ratio Pre and Post Trigger Ratio
The portion of the waveform capture prior to and post a trigger
event.
Range:10/90, 20/80, 30/70, 40/60, 50/50. 60/40, 70/30, 80/20,
90/10
Factory Default is 50/50
Capture Now
Waveform
Captured
Capture Now ON/OFF
Manual trigger to triggering a waveform capture. When put to
Capture Now ON the controller will perform a waveform capture
and set the setting to Waveform Captured.
Range: ON/OFF
Factory default is OFF
Setting Description
Waveform Capture Trigger
Automatic triggers for waveform capture:
Prot Trip Protection Trip
Manual Close Manual Close (includes IOEX close and protocol close)
Manual Trip Manual Trip
Auto Close Auto Close (includes auto-reclose, loop automation close, and
generator control close)
Harmonics Harmonics outside their alarm limit
Factory default is blank.
Setting Description
- - - - - - - - - - - Waveform Trigger - - - - - - - - - M
Prot Trip blank
blank blank
blank blank
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
11-6
Automation
12-1
12 Automation
The Loop Automation option is available under licence from your
distributor.
Introduction Loop Automation is a Distribution System Automation (DSA) scheme
that will automatically reconfigure a network to restore supply to fault
free sections that have been disconnected due to a fault in another part
of the network. Loop Automation can also re-install the normal network
configuration automatically when the faulted section has been repaired
and re-energised.
Loop Automation becomes available and adds additional display pages
to the Automation display group when the setting SYSTEM
STATUS>>OPTIONS 2>> Loop Auto Available is selected.
A Loop Automation scheme consists of a number of automatic circuit
reclosers that have been programmed to react to a loss of supply and/
or change of power flow. The way each recloser reacts to changing
network conditions is determined by its type designation. There can be
three types of recloser in a Loop Automation scheme and the type
assigned to each recloser is determined by its location in the network.
The types of recloser are:
Feeder Recloser - this recloser is positioned close to the sub-station
and is normally closed.
Tie Recloser - positioned close to or at the end of two feeders which
can be connected and is normally open.
Mid-Point Recloser - can be positioned anywhere along a feeder
between a Feeder and Tie recloser.
Each of the recloser types operates independently according to its own
set of rules. A Loop Automation scheme does not require
communications between reclosers, therefore no additional equipment
is needed. Loop Automation is a software feature.
Example LA Scheme Fault Isolation and Network Re-Configuration
Figure 14: Example of a Loop Automation Scheme
The example in the above figure shows a Loop Automation scheme
consisting of two feeder reclosers, one midpoint and one tie. A fault in
section B will cause the protection for the upstream feeder recloser to
trip that recloser and de-energise the faulted section B as well as the
fault-free section C.
Zone Substation
Fault
Feeder
Recloser
Substation
CB
Substation
CB
Feeder
Recloser
Mid-Point
Recloser
Tie
Recloser
A B C
D E
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
12-2
The feeder recloser may trip and auto-reclose a number of times in an
attempt to clear the fault. This is the normal protection operation which
will happen regardless of whether or not Loop Automation is enabled.
If Loop Automation is enabled it will initiate the following sequence of
events after the auto-reclose sequence has finished and the feeder
recloser has gone to lockout:
1 The MP ACR changes protection group in anticipation of power flow
change.
2 The tie recloser will detect loss of volts on one side and close.
3 The midpoint recloser is tripped by its protection due to the fault on
section B and goes directly to lockout without an auto-reclose.
The network has now been configured with the faulted section B
isolated at both ends and the unfaulted section C energised via the
closed tie recloser.
Auto-Restoration Option
Loop Automation can auto-restore the original network configuration
when the fault on section B is removed.
Auto-restoration is initiated when the fault on section B is removed and
either the feeder or midpoint recloser is closed. This will initiate the
following sequence:
The remaining open point (either the midpoint or feeder recloser)
will automatically close.
The tie recloser will open to restore the normal configuration.
The auto-restore capability is an option
- if the network cannot be run as a
closed loop then auto-restore cannot be
used and must be turned off.
To access the auto-restore option go to Automation>>Loop
Automation Configuration 1>>AutoRestore OFF .
Loop Automation is documented in its own Technical Manual (Part
Number ADC01-DOC-223)
Contact the manufacturer or your distributor for more information.
Windows Switchgear Operating System (WSOS5)
13-1
13 Windows Switchgear Operating System (WSOS5)
Basic configuration of the ADVC can be performed by either the OCP or
WSOS5. Some advanced features can only be configured via WSOS5 .
Introduction Windows Switchgear Operating System (WSOS5) is an alternative ADVC
interface. It is a software package,based on Microsoft Windows
1
, for a
Personal Computer (PC) that allows management, control and monitoring
of a population of ACRs. WSOS5 is purchased as an additional item.
WSOS5 provides easy access to all switchgear functions from opening/
closing, through configuring protection and communication parameters
to accessing measurement and analytical data. By using a desktop or
portable PC engineers can manage a large number of reclosers either
remotely via a communications link or locally via a serial port or
Ethernet connection.
WSOS5 includes:
Local language support
Advanced Controller support
SCADA communications capture tool
Controller firmware loading
Switchgear explorer
Launch pad
Switchgear status
Event log and filtering
Feature selection page
Setting page
WSOS5 provides facilities for:
On-line and off-line management of all protection settings.
Tripping and Closing of the ACR and other operator control
functions.
Up-loading of historical data (e.g. event record or demand
measurements) into the computer, which can be taken away and
processed elsewhere.
Embedded in the ADVC is server software for the WSOS5 package.
The server provides two interfaces for connection to WSOS5:
Local connection through an RS232 port. (Default Port A)
Via the Ethernet port.
1. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of
America, and other countries.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
13-2
OCP vs WSOS5 Most ADVC settings and/or features are available via both the OCP and
WSOS5, however:
some are available on the operator control panel only
some via WSOS5 only.
Other features are specific to WSOS5.
The following sections give details.
OCP and not WSOS5
Switchgear local/remote mode
Maximum Demand Indication reset
WSOS5 and not OCP
SCEM data read/writing and viewing
Event log history find by text and date
Event log history include & exclude text filter
Configurable history configuration and viewing and graphing
Harmonic history configuration and viewing
Waveform capture data retrieval, storage and viewing
Waveform generation
Configuration of IOEX maps
Configuration of DNP3 maps
Communication port selection
Communications capture
Per phase power monitoring
Feature selection Available/Not Available for
Low Gas Interlock,
Hit and Run,
Directional Blocking, and
Directional Protection
VT Configurator
Custom Menu configuration
Standard Menu first screen configuration
ADVC Password configuration
WSOS5 features that are not controller features
Launch pad
Switchgear explorer
Switchgear navigator
Switchgear status
Auto-data Retrieval (ADR)
Operator Log
Communications Output Log
Display and printing of settings
ADVC code loader
Communication statistics
Settings retrieval and storage
Settings export/import
4 user levels - operation, telecontrol, protection and system
ADVC Customisation
14-1
14 ADVC Customisation
Introduction The ADVC can be set up to operate in a manner of a user's or utilitys
preference via several customization options:
Feature selection - the ability to enable or disable a controller
feature. This includes enabling/disabling not only the feature's logic
but also all references to the feature's settings in WSOS5 and OCP.
This constrains both user interfaces to only the desired features.
Custom menus - a user defined collection of ADVC standard
displays duplicated in a separate menu to enable ease of use. Also
included is the ability to make the ADVC rotate the displays at a pre-
determined rate to show the ADVC settings and states without the
need to touch a key on the panel.
Standard menu:
First screen selection - if using standard menus, the first display
seen by an operator on power up is selectable from any page in the
system.
Language support - the panel can display its information in multiple
languages eg English international, English USA.
Display Settings Units - the ADVC can be set up to display either
Imperial or Metric units.
Configurable Quick Keys - the function of the quick keys can be
changed to suit individual needs
Plant name - a 30 character message can be added to the initial
power up screen for equipment identification purposes.
Feature Selection The ADVC has a feature enable/disable capability that allows it to be
customised to include or remove much of its functionality. Features that
are not required can be disabled or enabled via WSOS5 or the OCP on
the ADVC. When a feature is disabled all logic associated with that
feature is turned off, and any references to the feature are removed
from the OCP. This simplifies ADVC operation as well as OCP usage.
Enabling or disabling of ADVC features can be performed either via the
panel Options pages or WSOS5 Feature Selection page:
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
14-2
A typical OCP options page can be seen in the example below:
The displaying of Options pages of the
OCP is also configurable. Enabling/
disabling the options pages can be
done via SYSTEM STATUS - SYSTEM
SETTINGS 2.
Protection
Some settings can only be selected if certain other settings are
appropriate. Selecting some settings can cause other settings to
change. Such effects and dependencies are listed below:
Automation
Automation features are greyed out if not licenced.
--------------------- OPTIONS 1 -------------------S
Prot OFF Not Allow SEF Available
E/F OFF Allowed Seq Comp Available
NPS OFF Allowed
User Selection Prerequisite Setting(s) Changed
Protection OFF
Allowed to Not Allowed
None Protection ON
Protection OFF Not Allowed
Negative Phase Sequence OFF
Allowed to Not Allowed
Seq Comp Available Negative Phase Sequence ON
Negative Phase Sequence OFF Not Allowed
Sequence Components
Available to Not Available
None Negative Phase Sequence OFF Allowed
Negative Phase Sequence OFF
Sequence Components Not Available
Earth Fault OFF
Allowed to Not Allowed
None Earth Fault ON
Earth Fault OFF Not Allowed
Sensitive Earth Fault
Available to Not Available
None Sensitive Earth Fault OFF
Sensitive Earth Fault Not Available
Directional Blocking
OFF to ON
Directional Protection is
OFF
If the active protection group is B, D, F, H, or J
then the active settings group is set to one
less eg if group B is active then group A
becomes active
Directional Blocking ON
Directional Protection
OFF to ON
Directional Blocking is OFF
Automatic Protection Group
Selection is Not Available
Directional Protection ON
Directional Protection
ON to OFF
None Directional Protection OFF
If Loop Automation is ON then Automatic
Protection Group Selection is set to Available
Automatic Protection Group
Selection
Available to Not Available
Loop Automation is Not
Available
Automatic Protection Group Selection OFF
Automatic Protection Group Selection Not
Available
Automatic Protection Group
Selection
Not Available to Available
Number of protection
groups is greater than 1
Automatic Protection Group Selection OFF
Automatic Protection Group Selection Not
Available
Low Gas Interlock for
N-Series only
Available to Not
Available
None Low Gas Interlock ON
Low Gas Interlock OFF
Under-Over Frequency Protection
Available to Not Available
None Prot Groups A through J points:
- Under Frequency Trip
- Over Frequency Trip
- Normal Frequency Close
Active Protection Group Change is enabled
Under-Over Frequency Protection Not
Available
User Selection Prerequisite Setting(s) Changed
Loop Automation
Not Available to
Available
None If Directional Protection is OFF
then Automatic Protection Group
Selection is set to Available
Loop Automation Available
ADVC Customisation
14-3
General
The following general feature selections have no operational
dependencies and as such operate entirely independently of any other
ADVC feature.
Hit And Run - Not Available/Available
IOEX - Not Available/Available
Configurable Quick Keys - Not Available/Available
Panel Display Options - Not Available/Available
Custom Menu - Not Available/Available
Battery Health Test - Not Available/Available
Communications
The following communication feature selections have no operational
dependencies and as such operate entirely independently of any other
ADVC feature.
Radio Data Interface - Not Available/Available
DNP3 - Not Available/Available
SCADA Communications Diagnostics - Not Available/Available
Power Quality
Power Quality features are greyed out if not licenced.
The following power quality feature selections have no operational
dependencies and as such operate entirely independently of any other
ADVC feature.
Supply Outages - Not Available/Available
Waveform Capture - Not Available/Available
Harmonic Analysis - Not Available/Available
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
14-4
ADVC OCP Display Menus Plant Name
When the OCP is activated the following power up screen is seen
momentarily. The text "Intelligent Power" can be replaced by a user
defined 30 character message. This is useful for displaying the ADVCs
tag name or plant name to an operator.
-
To change the text: "Intelligent Power", setting called Plant name is
available on the Status Page of a WSOS5 switchgear configuration.
The setting can accept 90 characters but only the first 30 are shown on
the panel.
Intelligent Power
ADVC
<< System Calibrated >>
ADVC Customisation
14-5
Menu Types The ADVC supports two types of menu configuration:
Standard Menu
Custom Menu
Standard Menu The controller's standard menu has a six display group navigation
structure. Navigation within the standard menu is described in the
product's Installation and Maintenance manual. Diagrams of menu
navigation are also available under the controller hatch and inside the
controller door.
System Status Display Group
Contains all status information about the recloser and controller eg
battery low, operations count, SEF enabled/disabled.
Information on this display group is given in Appendix I - System Status
Pages (page I-1).
All system status displays are identified by the symbol S in the top
right hand corner of display.
Event Log Display Group
Shows the event record for the controller.
More information is given in the chapter Event Log on page 6-1 and
see the list of events in Appendix M - List of Events (page M-1).
Figure 15: Display Group Navigation
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
14-6
Measurement Display Group
Contains all information about the controller's current, voltage,
frequency and power measurements.
Information on this display group is given in Appendix J - Measurement
Pages (page J-1).
All measurement displays are identified by the symbol M in the top
right hand corner of display.
Protection Display Group
Contains all the protection settings currently in use eg Trip current
settings, curves, reclose times.
Information on this display group is given in Appendix K - Protection
Pages (page K-1).
All protection displays are identified by the symbol P in the top right
hand corner of display.
Automation Display Group
Contains all the information for controller automation schemes such as
Loop automation, auto changeover and generator control.
Information on this display group is given in Appendix L - Automation
Pages (page L-1).
All automation displays are identified by the symbol A in the top right
hand corner of display.
This group is only displayed when one or more automation features are
available.
Communication Display Group
Contains all the information for configuring communication ports as well
as communication protocols.
Information on this display group is given in Appendix M -
Communication Pages (page M-1).
All communication displays are identified by the symbol C in the top
right hand corner of display.
First Screen Selection
The page displayed when the panel is first activated is user selectable.
It can be any page in the standard menu. The system default is the Trip
Flags screen.
If custom menu is used and rotating screens mode is active then the
first screen feature is overridden.
If the first screen selected is unavailable in the controller then the
controller will default to the trip flags screen.
Selection of first screen can only be done via the WSOS5 Configuration
- Menu Configuration window. Refer to the WSOS5 help file for more
information.
Locale Related System Settings
The ADVC has a number of global settings that enable you to
customise its behaviour. These settings are mainly locale related and
--------------- System Settings 1 ----------------S
Lang English (Intl) Display Metric
System Freq 50Hz ate/Time 1/04/2005
07:42:43
ADVC Customisation
14-7
include engineering units used, date/time format, system frequency,
and language display.
Configurable Quick Keys
The controller has four keys that can be configured by the user for a
specific purpose to enable ease of use. The Default quick keys are
shown at left.
Any of the these keys (except the Enter key) can be mapped to one of
the settings listed below:
LOCAL/Remote/Hit and Run
Loop Auto ON/OFF
Prot Group
Reset Flags
Changing quick keys requires
updating of the OCP quick key labels
using stickers provided with the
ACR. Failure to match software and
OCP may cause incorrect operation
of ACR. Contact your distributor if
additional stickers are required.
Work Tag ON/OFF
Auto Reclose ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
Cold Load ON/OFF
Earth Protection ON/OFF
Live Block
Negative Phase Sequence Protection OFF/ON/Alarm
A quick key can also be set to Blank if it is not required.
For more information about how to configure quick keys refer to the
equipment installation and maintenance manual.
Custom Menu The ADVC can be configured such that the user is shown a custom
menu showing only those pages from the standard menu that are of
interest. Up to 12 pages can be mapped to the custom menu.
Selection of custom menu screens can only be done via the WSOS5
Configuration - Menu Configuration window. Refer to the WSOS5 help
file for more information.
Setting Description
Lang Language Selection
If English (Intl) selected then
- All references to ground become earth
- All references to Hot Line Tag become Work Tag
If English (USA) selected then
- All references to earth become ground
- All references to Work Tag become Hot Line Tag
Range: English (Intl), English (USA)
Factory default is English (Intl)
Display Display Engineering Units
If Metric is selected, gas pressure
a
is displayed in kPa.
If Imperial is selected, gas pressure is displayed in PSI.
This is a system-wide change that affects panel and WSOS5
displayed values, as well as configurable history data.
Range: Metric, Imperial
Factory default is Metric.
a. Only applicable to the N-Series ACR.
System Freq System Frequency
The frequency of the network to which the ACR is connected.
It is vital that this setting is set up correctly in order for the
ACR to measure current accurately.
Range: 50, 60 Hz
Factory default is 50 Hz.
Date/Time System Date/Time
System time and date/time format.
Range: DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY
Factory default is DD/MM/YYYY.
- - - - - - - - - -Quick Key Selection - - - - - - - - S
LOCAL/Remote Earth Prot
Auto ON/OFF Enter Prot Group
Figure 16: Menu Configuration Window
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
14-8
Menu screens for features that are unavailable can be selected for the
custom menu. If the feature is unavailable then the screen is skipped by
the custom menu.
Rotating Custom Menu
The custom menu can be placed in rotation mode. When in rotation
mode the panel will continuously cycle through the custom menu
screens. The period of the cycle is user configurable. This allows users
to view all relevant settings or find a particular page without pressing a
key on the panel.
Enabling/disabling the rotating screen feature as well as setting the
rotation delay period can only be done via the WSOS5 Configuration -
Menu Configuration window shown above. Refer to the WSOS5 help
file for more information.
Custom/Standard Menu Navigation
The custom and standard menus are designed to co-exist on the
ADVC. If a custom menu has been configured it, rather than the
standard menu, is shown by default. Switching between the custom and
standard menus is achieved by pressing the CUSTOM MENU key.
The standard menu display is always available. In all circumstances
movement around the standard menu is as described in the product's
Installation and Maintenance manual.
If the Custom Menu feature is enabled and rotation mode is disabled:
Pressing the MENU key at any time will move the user to the next
standard menu display group.
Pressing the CUSTOM MENU key will move the user to the next page
in the custom display group.
When displaying the custom display menu, operation of the quick
keys, the ALT key, the SELECT key and the arrow keys are as per
standard display group behaviour e.g. the SELECT key highlights a
setting and the arrow keys move to the previous or next screen.If
the Custom Menu feature is enabled and rotation mode is enabled
then:
Pressing the ALT key, MENU key, SELECT key or either arrow key
will halt rotation and the currently visible page will remain displayed.
Pressing ALT, SELECT or either arrow key are as per standard menu
group behaviour for the currently visible page.
Pressing the MENU key will move the display to the next standard
menu display group.
Pressing the CUSTOM MENU key will restart rotation.
If rotation is halted then when a quick key operation is completed
rotation will remain halted.
If rotation is active then when a quick key operation is completed
rotation will continue.
The TRIP and CLOSE keys are always active and are independent of
standard or custom menu behaviour.
Accessories
15-1
15 Accessories
The following accessories are available for the ADVC:
Ensure that the ADVC is switched
off before proceeding with the
installation of any accessory.
IOEX;
TTS.
Additional accessories are under development.
Input Output Expander Card
(IOEX2)
The Input Output Expander (IOEX2) card provides optically isolated
input contacts and voltage free output contacts to allow connection of
an external Remote Terminal Unit (RTU). It is installed in a die cast,
sealed enclosure which is mounted on, and earthed via, a DIN rail in the
customer compartment.
A mapping held in the ADVC database controls the function of the
IOEX2. It specifies what database information is mapped into the
IOEX2 outputs and which controls are mapped into the IOEX2 inputs.
The bottom line of the IOEX Status display page identifies the mapping
loaded:
The standard mapping for inputs and outputs are shown in "" -
page 15-3 and "Outputs - Standard Mapping" - page 15-4.
Some equipment may be supplied with alternative mappings.
I/O Field Excitation
The field excitation for IOEX2 inputs/outputs MUST NOT be provided
from the control cubicle battery nor the radio power supply. Doing so will
breach the isolation barriers and introduce serious risk of damage or
interference to the control electronics.
Part Description
Switchgear Any
Controller ADVC only
Communications interface RS232 to the CAPE
Inputs 8
Input Specification 12V 150V AC or DC - must be sourced
externally to the ADVC.
Outputs 8
Max Output Specification 150VDC at 1A or 150VAC RMS at 2A Non-
inductive - must be sourced externally to the
ADVC.
Impulse Performance Immune to reset and can withstand a 900A
impulse current applied to any input or output
pin without failure.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
15-2
IOEX2 Installation
The IOEX2 is mounted on the DIN rail in the Customer enclosure at the
top of the ADVC as shown in the following picture:
The IOEX2 is suspended from the DIN rail by way of two fittings on its
rear surface:
IOEX2 Power Supply
RS232 Controller Port
Accessories
15-3
To fit the IOEX2:
Ensure that the ADVC is switched
off before proceeding with the
installation of the IOEX2.
1 Holding the IOEX2 perpendicular, place the upper hooks of the
hanging fittings over the top edge of the DIN rail.
2 Push the IOEX2 firmly against the back surface of the Customer
compartment until the lower end of the hanging fittings engage with
the bottom edge of the DIN rail.
3 Push the green/yellow earth terminal firmly on to the DIN rail until it
is engaged at both the top and bottom.
4 Connect the IOEX2 supply and the RS 232 plug from the controller.
IOEX Status Page
The the SYSTEM STATUS - IOEX STATUS page displays the status
of the IOEX inputs and outputs to assist debugging during installation
and maintenance.
The top line of the display is the page title and the letter S to the right
indicates that this page is located in the System Status Display Group.
The next three lines are the data on display.
The fields are described as follows:
When the IOEX2 configuration is invalid or has some other problems
such as wrong hardware type, the OCI flashes the message IOEX
Configuration Corrupt or Invalid at the top of the screen.
The displayed data looks like this:
Inputs - Standard Mapping
The IOEX has 8 independent, optically isolated inputs, each with Metal
Oxide Varistor (MOV) protection. DC in either polarity or AC input
signals are accepted. Input Voltage range is12V 150V AC or DC.
Field Explanation
Inputs
1 - - - * - - - - 8
This indicates the current state of the inputs. A dash
represents the OFF state and an asterisk * the ON state.
Outputs
1 - * - - - - - * 8
This indicates the current state of the outputs. A dash
represents the OFF state and an asterisk * the ON state.
IOEX OK Shows the status of the IOEX2:
IOEX OK means that the mapping is valid and in service.
Invalid Map Invalid Map means there is a problem with the IOEX2
mapping in the database. Contact the manufacturer.
Unplugged Unplugged is displayed if the ADVC is not receiving data
from the IOEX2, check the cabling.
Wrong Type Wrong Type is displayed if the IOEX2 hardware is detected
as being different to the mapping, contact the manufacturer.
Initialising Initialising is displayed while the IOEX2 is being initialised.
Input
Number
Terminal
Number
Inputs ON
Recloser
1 1-2 Trip the switchgear, set lockout and inhibit all close
operations
2 3-4 Close the ACR
- - - - - - - - - - - - IOEX STATUS - - - - - - - - - - - S
Inputs 1- - - - - - 8
Outputs 1 - - - - - - 8
IOEX 2 OK
- - - - - - - - - - - - - IOEX STATUS - - - - - - - - - - - S
Inputs 1------8 Local
Outputs 1*--*----8 Unplugged
Standard IOEX Mapping
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
15-4
The recloser close input will only function when the Work Tag is off.
Tripping and controlling all other settings is independent of the Work
Tag status.
If the IOEX Trip input is held on while either the IOEX close or
manual close input is activated, the recloser will not close. This is
indicated in the event log by a Close Blocking ON and Close
Blocking OFF event whenever the IOEX Trip input changes state.
The SEF protection ON functionality operates as discussed in
Protection Features on page 8-1. If the earth fault protection or the
SEF availability for the active protection group are turned off then
the SEF protection will NOT turn on.
If both SEF protection ON and OFF inputs are on, the default is SEF
protection ON.
If both Auto Reclose ON and OFF inputs are on, the default is
Auto Reclose ON.
All the above inputs are edge-triggered, so the effect will not take place
if the blocking condition is removed.
Outputs - Standard Mapping
The IOEX has 8 independent voltage free relay contact outputs, each
with MOV protection. The contacts are rated for 150VDC at 1A or
150VAC RMS at 2A non-inductive.
3 5-6 SEF protection ON
4 7-8 SEF protection OFF
5 9-10 Auto Reclose ON
6 11-12 Auto Reclose OFF
7 13-14 Protection Set A Selected
8 15-16 Protection Set B Selected
Output
Number
a
a. The IOEX contacts are not guaranteed to change during fast Auto Reclose
sequences but will indicate the final steady state condition within 150ms.
Terminal
Number
Output On
(relay closed)
Output Off
(relay open)
1 17-18 Tripped Closed
2 19-20 Closed Tripped
3 21-22 Flag A, Overcurrent Protection Trip
indication.
4 23-24 Lockout Not in
lockout
5 25-26 SEF protection ON SEF
protection
OFF
6 27-28 Auto Reclose ON Auto
Reclose
OFF
7 29-30 Flag B, Overcurrent Protection Trip
indication.
8 31-32 System Healthy See Section
(page 15-5)
Other
conditions
Input
Number
Terminal
Number
Inputs ON
Recloser
Accessories
15-5
System Healthy Indicator
The IOEX system healthy indicator is present when all of the following
are true:
Aux Supply OK.
Battery Supply OK.
SCEM Data Valid.
ADVC Electronics OK.
Gas pressure normal.
Contact Life greater than 20% on all phases.
IOEX to ADVC communications OK.
Mechanism OK
Failure of any of these will cause the system healthy flag to be
extinguished.
Power Consumption
If an IOEX2 is fitted to the control cubicle, the battery holdup time may
be affected.
This is due to the current drawn by the IOEX2. The manufacturers
battery holdup time rating is based on a recloser installation without the
IOEX2 fitted.
Configuring the IOEX
WSOS5 Version 5.1 or higher incorporates the Configurable IOEX Tool
which allows you to generate custom I/O mappings for an IOEX2.
Logic can be applied to each point with up to five sets of logic or
actions for each input and one trigger action for each output.
The tool can be used to read mappings from previous versions of
software but can only create files for use with the specified software
versions.
Custom maps can be created for an IOEX2 and loaded into the ADVC
directly from WSOS5. The types of actions that can be mapped to each
input or output is dependent on the software version loaded into the
ADVC.
When the tool is started you are asked to input the software version
number.This is then used to retrieve a valid set of points to use when
constructing logic within the tool.
The mappings and I/O logic are created using the tool and saved to an
IOEX mapping file in WSOS5. Once a valid file has been created it is
linked to the switchgear device configuration in WSOS5 and written to
the ADVC.
The IOEX Configuration tool is intended to be used Off-Line only.
Mappings are created, saved and linked to a WSOS5 switchgear device
configuration while disconnected from the switchgear. Once these tasks
have been completed you connect to the device and write the new
mapping into the ADVC along with the switchgear device configuration.
Refer to the WSOS5 Help file for more information.
Trip Source
a
Flag A, Trip indication Flag B, Trip indication
Reset, Set to this state on
Recloser Close.
Off Off
Phase Trip On On
Earth Trip Off On
SEF Trip On Off
a. The trip Source outputs do not indicate other causes of a trip such as Loss of
Phase.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
15-6
Test and Training Set For simplified testing in the field or in the workshop a purpose built test set
called a Test and Training Set (TTS) is available.
The TTS is a briefcase sized test set which connects to the ADVC and
allows a standard secondary injection test set to be connected to inject cur-
rents into the ADVC. The TTS will also simulate the ACR and allow com-
prehensive testing of the control electronics. The TTS is highly suited to
train staff in maintenance and operations.
The test and training set is purchased as a separate item. For further infor-
mation refer to your distributor.
A-1
Appendix A ACR Models
N-Series Recloser The N-Series ACR utilises vacuum interrupters contained in a fully
welded and sealed 316 marine grade stainless steel enclosure. The
enclosure is filled with sulphur hexafluoride (SF
6
) gas as an insulator.
The ACR is operated by sending a controlled pulse of current from
storage capacitor in the ADVC through a solenoid. This attracts the
mechanism plate which, in turn closes the contacts in the vacuum
interrupter. The contacts are held in the closed position by latch tongues
resting on the trip bar.
Opening of the contacts is achieved by releasing a controlled pulse of
current from a capacitor throught the trip coil. This attracts the trip bar
armature, turning the trip bar and releasing the latch. The opening
spring and the contact pressure springs accelerate the contacts open. A
flexible connection is provided to allow movement of the contacts to
occur.
Epoxy bushings insulate the main circuit conductors from the tank and
provide a double O ring seal. They also provide the necessary
insulation and support for the embedded capacitive voltage
transformers (CVT) and for the current transformers (CT). The bushings
are DIN 47 636 (threaded option) and allow the connection of
alternative cable connection elbows if desired. Lightning arrester
mounting is provided for installation convenience.
A standard kit for field fitting is supplied with the ACR. It contains
Silicone bushing boots and 3 metre lengths of 185 mm aluminium
insulated water tight cable tails rated at 400A. This arrangement results
in a recloser suitable for connection into an insulated conductor system,
or a bare conductor system, as appropriate. The fully insulated system
provides freedom from faults caused by birds and other wildlife.
An auxiliary voltage supply of 110, 220 or 240 volts AC is required to
power the unit. Where this is inconvenient, a voltage transformer can be
provided as a purchase option. The ADVC is connected by a control
cable to the bottom of the ACR through a rubber covered plug/socket
arrangement.
A clearly visible external pointer shows the contact position. The
recloser can be tripped from the ground by a hookstick. It can then be
locked out by opening the isolating switches located on the Operator
Control Panel. These switches are physically connected in series with
both the Trip and Close solenoids.
The ADVC interfaces to the recloser via the control cable and connects
to the Switch Cable Entry Module (SCEM) in the base of the tank. The
SCEM uses non-volatile memory to store all relevant calibration data,
ratings and number of operations. The SCEM also provides the first
stage of electrical isolation and shorting electronics to short the CTs and
CVTs in the event the control cable is disconnected while current is
flowing through the recloser.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
A-2
U-Series Recloser The U-Series ACR is operated by a magnetic actuator which produces
a positive opening and closing action. Switching occurs when a
controlled pulse is sent through the open/close actuator from a storage
capacitor in the ADVC. When closed, the switch is latched magnetically.
Spring loaded pushrods provide contact loading on the interrupters.
A Current Transformer (CT) and a Capacitive Voltage Transformer
(CVT) are moulded in the CT-housing. These are monitored by the
ADVC for protection, remote monitoring and display.
An auxiliary voltage supply of 110, 220 or 240 volts AC is required to
power the unit. Where this is inconvenient, a voltage transformer can be
provided as a purchase option. A control cable connects the ADVC to
the bottom of the ACR through a covered plug/socket sealing
arrangement on both the ADVC and the tank.
The recloser is supplied with copper stems or optional cable clamp
connectors. Mounting brackets for lightning arresters are optionally
available.
The recloser contact position is shown by a large, clearly visible
external pointer.
A hookstick can be used to engage the manual trip ring to trip and
lockout the recloser from the ground. The mechanical trip ring has two
positions. In the up position normal operation takes place. In the
down position the recloser is tripped and both mechanically and
electronically locked open.
The ADVC interfaces to the recloser via the control cable and connects
to the Switch Cable Entry Module (SCEM) in the base of the tank. The
SCEM uses non-volatile memory to store all relevant calibration data,
ratings and number of operations. The SCEM also provides the first
stage of electrical isolation and shorting electronics to short the CTs and
CVTs in the event the control cable is disconnected while current is
flowing through the recloser.
A-3
Other Reclosers The ADVC C-Series and V-Series controllers are available as retrofit
controllers for other three-phase reclosers using 24Vdc trip/close
control circuits.
The mechanical operation described in this section is limited to the type
of recloser using separate opening and closing solenoids. The three
main contacts of these reclosers are ganged together and can therefore
not be operated separately. Two different mechanisms are typically
found in the field. While the trip mechanism for both of these are
essentially the same, the closing mechanisms differ in that one uses a
high voltage (phase-to-phase) solenoid and the other uses an external
close power source. The figures on this page show the main
components of the mechanisms under discussion.
Tripping
The trip mechanism of the recloser comprises two main components.
These are:
opening springs, and
a trip solenoid.
Opening springs are used to accelerate the main contacts open during
a trip operation. These springs are charged during a close operation.
To trip the recloser, the controller energises a trip solenoid inside the
recloser via the trip signal (24Vdc). This solenoid releases a spring-
loaded assembly which snatches the recloser contacts open.
The Advanced Controller will trip the recloser when:
a fault situation is detected according to the programmed
characteristics,
an automation scheme instructs the recloser to open,
a local operator trips the recloser using the Operator Control Panel,
and
a remote operator trips the recloser using a communication link.
Closing
The closing mechanism comprises two main electrical components.
These are:
a close contactor, and
a closing solenoid.
The close contactor is controlled by the controller via the close signal.
When the close signal is active (24Vdc), the close contactor connects
the closing solenoid to its power source (internal phase-to-phase or an
external close power source) and the recloser closes. When the
operating mechanism reaches the closed position it is mechanically
latched allowing the close solenoid to be de-energised.
The closing solenoid provides the main contact closing force and the
force to charge the opening springs. Two different types of closing
solenoids are typically used in reclosers. These are:
high voltage closing solenoids suitable for phase-to-phase
connection, and
low voltage closing solenoids powered from an external close power
source (typically 120 - 240 Vac).
The specifications of the Close control signal for both closing
mechanisms are the same. Therefore a common controller is used.
The ADVC will close the recloser when:
a reclose sequence is in progress,
an automation scheme instructs the recloser to close,
a local operator closes the recloser using the Operator Control
Panel, and
a remote operator closes the recloser using a communication link.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
A-4
Recloser overview and operation Retrofit controller
The Advanced Controller is equipped with a switchgear interface
capable of controlling the following types of three-phase, electronically
controlled reclosers:
The C-Series or V-Series ADVC can operate the reclosers listed
above. Furthermore the ADVC also brings with it a host of
communication and protection features.
By interfacing to the internal sensing Current Transformers (CTs) of the
recloser, the ADVC provides the basic protection features found in the
previous controller and also a large number of advanced protection
features.
As a retrofit controller the ADVC caters for the following scenarios:
Existing installations with Voltage Transformers (VTs);
Existing installations with VTs connected via a Y transformer;
Existing installations without VTs; and
Existing installations without VTs requiring an upgrade to include
voltage measurement.
Two controller models
The Advanced Controller is available in two retrofit controller models:
C-Series; and
V-Series.
The basic operation, as described above, is exactly the same for both
models with the main difference between the two models being that the
V-Series includes provision for connecting measurement Voltage
Transformers.
C-Series Advanced Controller
It is possible to retrofit recloser applications without voltage
measurement using the C-Series controller. Although voltage
dependent features will not be available for this application, upgrading
will bring with it the latest technology, better protection accuracy and
flexibility, and powerful communication capabilities.
V-Series Advanced Controller
The V-Series is an ideal retrofit controller for existing recloser
applications where Voltage Transformers (VTs) are used for
measurement and auxiliary power. The controller utilises the existing
military style connectors to connect both the switchgear and VTs. It is
possible to nominate the "Source" or "Load" side VT to be used as
Auxiliary AC supply and also includes a VT Configurator tool to define
the relationship between VTs and CTs. This feature requires no change
to the wiring in the VT junction box, making it very easy to use the V-
Series as a retrofit controller.
From Cooper Power Systems: Kyle/Cooper
WE
WVE27
WVE38X
VWE
VWVE27
VWVE38X
A-5
C-Series - V-Series comparison
Features C-Series V-Series
Source side VTs 0 3
Load side VTs 0 1 - 3
CTs 1000:1 1000:1;
Auxiliary supply Utility auxiliary supply Source or load-side VT
Recloser Closing Power HV phase-to-phase or external low voltage
supply provided by the utility.
HV phase-to-phase or the controller routes
power from one of the VTs to the recloser.
Protection features Multiple protection groups
Inrush restraint
Cold load pick-up
Sequence reset time
Inverse time curves
Instantaneous protection
Definite time protection
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)
Sequence Coordination
Multiple protection groups
Inrush restraint
Cold load pick-up
Sequence reset time
Inverse time curves
Instantaneous protection
Definite time protection
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)
Sequence Coordination
Protection features requiring voltage
measurement
Automatic Protection Group Selection
Directional blocking and directional
protection;
Sequence components;
Over/Under voltage protection;
Synchronisation check;
Loss of phase protection;
Live load blocking;
Dead lockout;
Supply Outage Measurement;
Harmonic analysis;
Waveform capture;
Loop Automation;
Voltage and power measurement.
Measurement features Current
Configurable history
Event history
Voltage
Current
Power
Configurable history
Event history
Power quality toolkit
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
A-6
B-1
Appendix B Dimensions
ADVC
Figure 17: ADVC Dimensions
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
B-2
Customer Equipment Space
Figure 18: Customer equipment space
C-1
Appendix C Replaceable Parts & Tools
All replacement parts listed in the following table are available from the
manufacturer, special purpose tools are also listed.
ADVC Part
Stock or Part
Number
Antenna Surge Arrester ELCMIS0211
Basic Display Unit (BDU1 - Nu-Lec English) 998000025
Basic Display Unit (BDU1 - Merlin Gerin English) 998000026
Basic Display Unit (BDU1 - Nu-Lec USA) 998000028
Battery 12 V 7.2 Ah Sealed Lead Acid, set of 2 997000000
Battery 12 V 12 Ah Sealed Lead Acid, set of 2 998000055
Battery Heater 998000040
CAPE Housing Main Gasket ADC-101
Control and Protection Enclosure (CAPE1 - for manufacturers switch) 998000015
Control Cubicle Body 998000045
Control Cubicle Door 998000050
Control Cubicle Door Seal (24 mm x 6 mm, Black) NEO091008
Customer Tray 1 998000030
Customer Tray Terminal Block 998000035
Fiber optic modem 998000090
IOEX2 kit 998000080
Pole mount adapter for PTCC retrofit 998000125
Power Supply Unit (PSU1 - English international) 998000020
Power Supply Unit (PSU1 - English USA) 998000020
PSU Main gasket ADC-110
Tait radio accessory kit 99800085
Test and Training Set (TTS) TTS1-02
WSOS5 cable 998000095
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
C-2
D-1
Appendix D ADVC Schematics
Figure 19: ADVC - general arrangement
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
D-2
Figure 20: Control cable service drawing
E-1
Appendix E IEC255 Inverse Time Protection Tables
The Inverse time protection curves in this appendix are as defined by
IEC255 standard where I is the actual current expressed as a multiple
of the trip current set by the user:
Type A - Inverse, for which the equation is:
Time to Trip = 0.14 / (I
0.02
- 1)
Type B - Very Inverse, for which the equation is:
Time to Trip = 13.5 / (I-1)
Type C - Extremely Inverse, for which the equation is:
Time to Trip = 80 / (I
2
- 1).
They are defined in terms of a formula such as:
Time = T / (I
N
- Q) + B
Where
T = time parameter specific to characteristic
I = ratio of current to pickup setting
N = parameter specific to characteristic
Q = parameter specific to characteristic
B = parameter specific to characteristic
Tables for the times to trip for each of these curves are given below.
Setting Current Multiple Inverse Time (secs) Very Inverse Time (secs) Extremely Inverse Time (secs)
1.10 73.37 135.00 380.95
1.50 17.19 27.00 64.00
2.00 10.03 13.50 26.67
2.50 7.57 9.00 15.24
3.00 6.30 6.75 10.00
3.50 5.52 5.40 7.11
4.00 4.98 4.50 5.33
4.50 4.58 3.86 4.16
5.00 4.28 3.38 3.33
5.50 4.04 3.00 2.74
6.00 3.84 2.70 2.29
6.50 3.67 2.45 1.94
7.00 3.53 2.25 1.67
7.50 3.40 2.08 1.45
8.00 3.30 1.93 1.27
8.50 3.20 1.80 1.12
9.00 3.12 1.69 1.00
9.50 3.04 1.59 0.90
10.00 2.97 1.50 0.81
10.50 2.91 1.42 0.73
11.00 2.85 1.35 0.67
11.50 2.80 1.29 0.61
12.00 2.75 1.23 0.56
12.50 2.70 1.17 0.52
13.00 2.66 1.13 0.48
IEC255 Inverse Time Protection table
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
E-2
13.50 2.62 1.08 0.44
14.00 2.58 1.04 0.41
14.50 2.55 1.00 0.38
15.00 2.52 0.96 0.36
15.50 2.48 0.93 0.33
16.00 2.46 0.90 0.31
16.50 2.43 0.87 0.29
17.00 2.40 0.84 0.28
17.50 2.38 0.82 0.26
18.00 2.35 0.79 0.25
18.50 2.33 0.77 0.23
19.00 2.31 0.75 0.22
19.50 2.29 0.73 0.21
20.00 2.27 0.71 0.20
20.50 2.24 0.69 0.19
21.00 2.23 0.68 0.18
21.50 2.21 0.66 0.17
22.00 2.20 0.64 0.17
22.50 2.18 0.63 0.16
23.00 2.16 0.61 0.15
23.50 2.15 0.60 0.15
24.00 2.13 0.59 0.14
24.50 2.12 0.57 0.13
25.00 2.11 0.56 0.13
25.50 2.09 0.55 0.12
26.00 2.08 0.54 0.12
26.50 2.07 0.53 0.11
27.00 2.05 0.52 0.11
27.50 2.04 0.51 0.11
28.00 2.03 0.50 0.10
28.50 2.02 0.49 0.10
29.00 2.01 0.48 0.10
29.50 2.00 0.47 0.09
30.00 1.99 0.47 0.09
Setting Current Multiple Inverse Time (secs) Very Inverse Time (secs) Extremely Inverse Time (secs)
IEC255 Inverse Time Protection table
F-1
Appendix F IEEE Inverse Time Protection Tables
The Inverse time protection curves in this appendices are as defined by
IEEE Std C37.112-1996 standard where I is the actual current
expressed as a multiple of the trip current set by the user:
Std Moderately inverse, for which the equation is:
Time to Trip = (0.0515 / (I
0.02
- 1)) + 0.114
Std Very inverse, for which the equation is:
Time to Trip = (19.61 / (I
2
- 1)) + 0.491
Std Extremely Inverse, for which the equation is:
Time to Trip = (28.2 / (I
2
- 1)) + 0.1217
These are defined in terms of a formula such as:
Time = T / (I
N
- Q) + B
Where
T = time parameter specific to characteristic
I = ratio of current to pickup setting
N = parameter specific to characteristic
Q = parameter specific to characteristic
B = parameter specific to characteristic
Tables for the times to trip for each of these curves are given below.
Setting Current
Multiple
Std Moderately Inverse
Time (secs)
Std Very Inverse Time
(secs)
Std Extremely Inverse
Time (secs)
1.10 27.11 93.87 134.41
1.50 6.44 16.18 22.68
2.00 3.80 7.03 9.52
2.50 2.90 4.23 5.49
3.00 2.43 2.94 3.65
3.50 2.14 2.23 2.63
4.00 1.95 1.80 2.00
4.50 1.80 1.51 1.59
5.00 1.69 1.31 1.30
5.50 1.60 1.16 1.09
6.00 1.53 1.05 0.93
6.50 1.46 0.97 0.81
7.00 1.41 0.90 0.71
7.50 1.37 0.85 0.63
8.00 1.33 0.80 0.57
8.50 1.29 0.77 0.52
9.00 1.26 0.74 0.47
9.50 1.23 0.71 0.44
10.00 1.21 0.69 0.41
10.50 1.18 0.67 0.38
11.00 1.16 0.65 0.36
11.50 1.14 0.64 0.34
12.00 1.12 0.63 0.32
12.50 1.11 0.62 0.30
13.00 1.09 0.61 0.29
IEEE Inverse Time Protection table
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
F-2
13.50 1.08 0.60 0.28
14.00 1.06 0.59 0.27
14.50 1.05 0.58 0.26
15.00 1.04 0.58 0.25
15.50 1.03 0.57 0.24
16.00 1.02 0.57 0.23
16.50 1.01 0.56 0.23
17.00 1.00 0.56 0.22
17.50 0.99 0.56 0.21
18.00 0.98 0.55 0.21
18.50 0.97 0.55 0.20
19.00 0.96 0.55 0.20
19.50 0.96 0.54 0.20
20.00 0.95 0.54 0.19
20.50 0.94 0.54 0.19
21.00 0.93 0.54 0.19
21.50 0.93 0.53 0.18
22.00 0.92 0.53 0.18
22.50 0.92 0.53 0.18
23.00 0.91 0.53 0.18
23.50 0.90 0.53 0.17
24.00 0.90 0.53 0.17
24.50 0.89 0.52 0.17
25.00 0.89 0.52 0.17
25.50 0.88 0.52 0.17
26.00 0.88 0.52 0.16
26.50 0.87 0.52 0.16
27.00 0.87 0.52 0.16
27.50 0.87 0.52 0.16
28.00 0.86 0.52 0.16
28.50 0.86 0.52 0.16
29.00 0.85 0.51 0.16
29.50 0.85 0.51 0.15
30.00 0.85 0.51 0.15
Setting Current
Multiple
Std Moderately Inverse
Time (secs)
Std Very Inverse Time
(secs)
Std Extremely Inverse
Time (secs)
IEEE Inverse Time Protection table
G-1
Appendix G Non-Standard Inverse Time Protection Curves
The 42 Inverse time protection curves in this appendix are non-
standard inverse curves.
Tables for the times to trip for each of these curves are given below.
Setting
Multiple
Current
TCC
010
TCC
101
TCC
102
TCC
103
TCC
104
TCC
105
TCC
106
TCC
107
TCC
111
1.10 0.145 0.100 0.214 0.301 0.445 0.705 1.015 1.218 2.589
1.50 0.100 0.036 0.065 0.128 0.252 0.351 0.396 0.597 1.121
2.00 0.080 0.022 0.028 0.075 0.155 0.232 0.203 0.291 0.651
2.50 0.069 0.019 0.022 0.052 0.107 0.171 0.117 0.159 0.443
3.00 0.060 0.017 0.019 0.040 0.067 0.137 0.073 0.095 0.325
3.50 0.056 0.016 0.017 0.033 0.040 0.113 0.046 0.055 0.250
4.00 0.053 0.016 0.016 0.029 0.028 0.097 0.030 0.034 0.201
4.50 0.050 0.015 0.016 0.025 0.022 0.085 0.022 0.024 0.169
5.00 0.048 0.015 0.016 0.022 0.019 0.076 0.019 0.020 0.146
5.50 0.046 0.015 0.016 0.020 0.017 0.068 0.016 0.017 0.127
6.00 0.045 0.015 0.016 0.019 0.016 0.059 0.015 0.016 0.113
6.50 0.044 0.015 0.016 0.018 0.015 0.053 0.013 0.015 0.101
7.00 0.043 0.015 0.016 0.017 0.014 0.048 0.013 0.014 0.091
7.50 0.042 0.015 0.016 0.016 0.013 0.043 0.012 0.013 0.083
8.00 0.041 0.015 0.016 0.016 0.012 0.038 0.011 0.013 0.076
8.50 0.041 0.015 0.016 0.015 0.012 0.033 0.011 0.013 0.069
9.00 0.040 0.015 0.016 0.015 0.011 0.030 0.011 0.012 0.063
9.50 0.040 0.015 0.016 0.015 0.011 0.027 0.011 0.012 0.057
10.00 0.039 0.015 0.016 0.015 0.011 0.025 0.011 0.012 0.053
10.50 0.039 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.024 0.011 0.012 0.049
11.00 0.039 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.022 0.011 0.011 0.045
11.50 0.039 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.021 0.011 0.011 0.041
12.00 0.038 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.020 0.011 0.011 0.038
12.50 0.038 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.019 0.011 0.011 0.036
13.00 0.038 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.018 0.011 0.011 0.033
13.50 0.037 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.017 0.011 0.011 0.031
14.00 0.037 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.016 0.011 0.011 0.030
14.50 0.037 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.016 0.011 0.011 0.029
15.00 0.037 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.015 0.011 0.011 0.027
15.50 0.037 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.015 0.011 0.011 0.026
16.00 0.036 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.025
16.50 0.036 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.024
17.00 0.036 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.023
17.50 0.036 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.023
18.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.013 0.011 0.011 0.022
18.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.013 0.011 0.011 0.022
19.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.013 0.011 0.011 0.021
19.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.013 0.011 0.011 0.021
Non-standard Inverse Time Protection table, TCC 010-111
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
G-2
20.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.020
20.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.020
21.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.019
21.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.019
22.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.019
22.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.018
23.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.018
23.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.018
24.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.017
24.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.017
25.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.012 0.011 0.011 0.017
25.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.017
26.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.016
26.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.016
27.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.016
27.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.016
28.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.016
28.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.016
29.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.016
29.50 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.016
30.00 0.035 0.015 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.011 0.016
Setting
Multiple
Current
TCC
112
TCC
113
TCC
114
TCC
115
TCC
116
TCC
117
TCC
118
TCC
119
TCC
120
1.10 2.415 2.954 6.054 4.692 5.752 5.396 6.949 6.401 9.354
1.50 1.024 1.264 2.376 1.792 2.301 2.291 2.511 2.505 3.755
2.00 0.563 0.704 1.398 0.726 1.216 1.396 1.248 1.518 2.013
2.50 0.356 0.467 0.952 0.374 0.748 0.920 0.754 1.145 1.302
3.00 0.257 0.358 0.699 0.219 0.499 0.649 0.523 0.940 0.925
3.50 0.198 0.293 0.532 0.141 0.351 0.489 0.384 0.809 0.696
4.00 0.158 0.259 0.420 0.096 0.259 0.391 0.295 0.716 0.549
4.50 0.132 0.233 0.334 0.067 0.200 0.321 0.234 0.652 0.462
5.00 0.113 0.215 0.261 0.049 0.159 0.270 0.193 0.602 0.398
5.50 0.099 0.203 0.206 0.038 0.129 0.231 0.162 0.572 0.348
6.00 0.088 0.196 0.164 0.030 0.107 0.200 0.139 0.549 0.311
6.50 0.079 0.189 0.127 0.025 0.090 0.176 0.121 0.529 0.281
7.00 0.073 0.185 0.098 0.021 0.078 0.156 0.107 0.512 0.257
7.50 0.068 0.182 0.076 0.019 0.068 0.140 0.096 0.499 0.236
8.00 0.063 0.180 0.053 0.018 0.060 0.126 0.087 0.487 0.220
8.50 0.059 0.179 0.038 0.017 0.053 0.115 0.078 0.477 0.207
9.00 0.056 0.177 0.032 0.016 0.048 0.105 0.071 0.468 0.195
Non-standard Inverse Time Protection table, TCC 112-120
Setting
Multiple
Current
TCC
010
TCC
101
TCC
102
TCC
103
TCC
104
TCC
105
TCC
106
TCC
107
TCC
111
Non-standard Inverse Time Protection table, TCC 010-111
G-3
9.50 0.053 0.176 0.028 0.015 0.043 0.097 0.066 0.461 0.185
10.00 0.050 0.175 0.025 0.014 0.039 0.089 0.060 0.455 0.175
10.50 0.048 0.174 0.024 0.014 0.036 0.083 0.056 0.452 0.167
11.00 0.046 0.174 0.022 0.014 0.034 0.078 0.051 0.448 0.161
11.50 0.044 0.173 0.021 0.014 0.031 0.073 0.048 0.445 0.155
12.00 0.043 0.172 0.020 0.014 0.029 0.068 0.045 0.441 0.150
12.50 0.041 0.172 0.019 0.014 0.027 0.064 0.042 0.439 0.145
13.00 0.040 0.172 0.018 0.014 0.026 0.059 0.040 0.436 0.141
13.50 0.039 0.171 0.018 0.014 0.024 0.055 0.037 0.434 0.137
14.00 0.038 0.171 0.017 0.014 0.023 0.052 0.035 0.432 0.134
14.50 0.037 0.171 0.017 0.014 0.022 0.048 0.034 0.431 0.130
15.00 0.036 0.170 0.016 0.014 0.020 0.044 0.032 0.429 0.128
15.50 0.035 0.170 0.016 0.014 0.019 0.041 0.031 0.429 0.126
16.00 0.034 0.170 0.016 0.014 0.019 0.039 0.030 0.428 0.124
16.50 0.033 0.170 0.015 0.014 0.018 0.037 0.029 0.427 0.122
17.00 0.032 0.169 0.015 0.014 0.017 0.035 0.028 0.427 0.121
17.50 0.032 0.169 0.015 0.014 0.016 0.033 0.026 0.426 0.119
18.00 0.031 0.169 0.014 0.014 0.016 0.031 0.025 0.426 0.117
18.50 0.031 0.169 0.014 0.014 0.015 0.030 0.025 0.425 0.115
19.00 0.030 0.168 0.014 0.014 0.015 0.029 0.024 0.425 0.114
19.50 0.030 0.168 0.014 0.014 0.014 0.028 0.023 0.424 0.113
20.00 0.029 0.168 0.014 0.014 0.014 0.027 0.022 0.424 0.111
20.50 0.029 0.168 0.014 0.014 0.014 0.026 0.022 0.423 0.110
21.00 0.028 0.167 0.013 0.014 0.013 0.026 0.021 0.423 0.109
21.50 0.028 0.167 0.013 0.014 0.013 0.025 0.020 0.422 0.108
22.00 0.028 0.167 0.013 0.014 0.013 0.025 0.020 0.422 0.106
22.50 0.027 0.167 0.013 0.014 0.013 0.024 0.019 0.422 0.105
23.00 0.027 0.167 0.013 0.014 0.012 0.024 0.019 0.421 0.104
23.50 0.027 0.166 0.013 0.014 0.012 0.023 0.019 0.421 0.103
24.00 0.026 0.166 0.013 0.014 0.012 0.023 0.018 0.421 0.102
24.50 0.026 0.166 0.013 0.014 0.012 0.023 0.018 0.421 0.102
25.00 0.026 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.012 0.022 0.018 0.421 0.101
25.50 0.026 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.012 0.022 0.017 0.421 0.100
26.00 0.026 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.012 0.021 0.017 0.421 0.099
26.50 0.025 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.011 0.021 0.017 0.421 0.098
27.00 0.025 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.011 0.021 0.017 0.421 0.098
27.50 0.025 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.011 0.020 0.016 0.421 0.097
28.00 0.025 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.011 0.020 0.016 0.421 0.096
28.50 0.025 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.011 0.020 0.016 0.421 0.096
29.00 0.025 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.011 0.020 0.016 0.421 0.095
29.50 0.025 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.011 0.020 0.016 0.421 0.095
30.00 0.025 0.166 0.012 0.014 0.011 0.020 0.016 0.421 0.095
Setting
Multiple
Current
TCC
112
TCC
113
TCC
114
TCC
115
TCC
116
TCC
117
TCC
118
TCC
119
TCC
120
Non-standard Inverse Time Protection table, TCC 112-120
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
G-4
Setting
Multiple
Current
TCC
121
TCC
122
TCC
131
TCC
132
TCC
133
TCC
134
TCC
135
TCC
136
TCC
137
1.10 8.877 8.219 10.610 13.732 13.716 11.367 13.660 15.655 19.198
1.50 1.145 4.430 8.306 4.460 5.602 4.790 6.369 4.658 10.162
2.00 0.019 2.616 7.106 2.586 3.020 2.387 3.677 2.781 6.495
2.50 0.014 1.689 6.425 1.571 1.920 1.507 2.566 1.884 4.756
3.00 0.012 1.102 6.101 1.002 1.329 1.079 1.969 1.339 3.667
3.50 0.011 0.653 5.901 0.722 0.973 0.847 1.616 1.024 2.933
4.00 0.011 0.347 5.730 0.552 0.754 0.698 1.367 0.833 2.416
4.50 0.011 0.114 5.624 0.438 0.613 0.617 1.197 0.686 2.006
5.00 0.011 0.037 5.537 0.353 0.511 0.553 1.072 0.550 1.694
5.50 0.011 0.022 5.460 0.287 0.432 0.508 0.974 0.448 1.464
6.00 0.011 0.019 5.398 0.236 0.371 0.484 0.900 0.367 1.287
6.50 0.011 0.017 5.359 0.198 0.323 0.463 0.849 0.304 1.155
7.00 0.011 0.016 5.334 0.169 0.284 0.446 0.805 0.252 1.062
7.50 0.011 0.015 5.312 0.146 0.253 0.436 0.767 0.210 0.990
8.00 0.011 0.014 5.290 0.127 0.227 0.432 0.735 0.172 0.928
8.50 0.011 0.013 5.269 0.110 0.205 0.427 0.711 0.142 0.873
9.00 0.011 0.013 5.251 0.097 0.186 0.423 0.689 0.116 0.824
9.50 0.011 0.012 5.233 0.086 0.170 0.419 0.670 0.087 0.786
10.00 0.011 0.012 5.216 0.077 0.157 0.416 0.651 0.064 0.753
10.50 0.011 0.012 5.210 0.070 0.146 0.415 0.635 0.049 0.730
11.00 0.011 0.011 5.208 0.064 0.137 0.415 0.619 0.038 0.714
11.50 0.011 0.011 5.208 0.058 0.128 0.415 0.607 0.032 0.699
12.00 0.011 0.011 5.208 0.053 0.121 0.415 0.599 0.029 0.685
12.50 0.011 0.011 5.208 0.049 0.115 0.415 0.591 0.026 0.671
13.00 0.011 0.011 5.208 0.046 0.109 0.415 0.584 0.024 0.662
13.50 0.011 0.011 5.208 0.043 0.103 0.415 0.577 0.022 0.653
14.00 0.011 0.011 5.208 0.040 0.098 0.415 0.571 0.021 0.645
14.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.037 0.093 0.415 0.566 0.020 0.640
15.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.035 0.089 0.415 0.561 0.019 0.635
15.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.033 0.085 0.415 0.556 0.018 0.629
16.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.032 0.082 0.415 0.553 0.017 0.626
16.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.030 0.078 0.415 0.551 0.017 0.622
17.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.029 0.076 0.415 0.549 0.017 0.619
17.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.027 0.074 0.415 0.548 0.016 0.616
18.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.026 0.072 0.415 0.546 0.016 0.614
18.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.025 0.070 0.415 0.544 0.015 0.612
19.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.023 0.068 0.415 0.543 0.015 0.610
19.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.023 0.066 0.415 0.541 0.015 0.608
20.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.022 0.065 0.415 0.539 0.015 0.606
20.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.022 0.063 0.415 0.538 0.015 0.605
21.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.021 0.061 0.415 0.537 0.015 0.603
21.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.021 0.060 0.415 0.535 0.015 0.602
Non-standard Inverse Time Protection table, TCC 121-137
G-5
22.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.020 0.058 0.415 0.534 0.015 0.602
22.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.020 0.057 0.415 0.533 0.015 0.602
23.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.019 0.056 0.415 0.531 0.015 0.602
23.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.019 0.054 0.415 0.530 0.015 0.602
24.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.018 0.054 0.415 0.529 0.015 0.602
24.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.018 0.053 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
25.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.018 0.052 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
25.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.018 0.051 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
26.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.017 0.051 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
26.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.017 0.050 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
27.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.017 0.049 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
27.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.017 0.049 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
28.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.017 0.048 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
28.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.017 0.047 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
29.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.017 0.047 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
29.50 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.017 0.046 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
30.00 0.011 0.011 5.207 0.017 0.046 0.415 0.528 0.015 0.602
Setting
Multiple
Current
TCC
138
TCC
139
TCC
140
TCC
141
TCC
142
TCC
151
TCC
152
TCC
161
TCC
162
1.10 20.647 15.250 25.082 19.763 36.299 38.923 72.701 19.879 27.549
1.50 9.741 5.097 10.141 15.227 16.543 11.551 45.263 3.860 8.109
2.00 5.905 2.889 5.802 13.159 9.181 5.848 39.251 1.688 3.793
2.50 4.115 1.943 4.122 12.159 5.868 3.688 36.458 1.002 2.331
3.00 3.117 1.446 3.254 11.511 3.711 2.545 35.035 0.686 1.570
3.50 2.493 1.139 2.708 11.095 2.372 1.888 33.905 0.494 1.117
4.00 1.949 0.929 2.323 10.860 1.507 1.489 32.987 0.371 0.819
4.50 1.583 0.776 2.057 10.655 1.101 1.244 32.235 0.299 0.615
5.00 1.299 0.661 1.857 10.486 0.849 1.068 31.587 0.248 0.486
5.50 1.085 0.564 1.695 10.419 0.701 0.973 31.014 0.209 0.394
6.00 0.925 0.486 1.590 10.383 0.595 0.894 30.568 0.180 0.325
6.50 0.802 0.423 1.506 10.351 0.511 0.828 30.234 0.158 0.274
7.00 0.703 0.373 1.434 10.321 0.445 0.773 29.955 0.140 0.235
7.50 0.625 0.332 1.372 10.293 0.391 0.728 29.690 0.126 0.206
8.00 0.561 0.297 1.315 10.267 0.346 0.687 29.441 0.114 0.182
8.50 0.508 0.268 1.268 10.243 0.310 0.652 29.226 0.105 0.162
9.00 0.462 0.242 1.226 10.220 0.279 0.622 29.021 0.097 0.145
9.50 0.422 0.221 1.197 10.199 0.253 0.600 28.880 0.091 0.130
10.00 0.388 0.202 1.168 10.180 0.231 0.579 28.768 0.085 0.117
10.50 0.360 0.185 1.144 10.175 0.211 0.565 28.661 0.079 0.106
11.00 0.337 0.171 1.119 10.175 0.194 0.551 28.564 0.075 0.097
Non-standard Inverse Time Protection table, TCC 138-162
Setting
Multiple
Current
TCC
121
TCC
122
TCC
131
TCC
132
TCC
133
TCC
134
TCC
135
TCC
136
TCC
137
Non-standard Inverse Time Protection table, TCC 121-137
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
G-6
11.50 0.315 0.158 1.098 10.175 0.179 0.539 28.463 0.071 0.089
12.00 0.297 0.146 1.079 10.175 0.166 0.529 28.376 0.067 0.082
12.50 0.280 0.135 1.060 10.175 0.154 0.518 28.290 0.064 0.076
13.00 0.265 0.126 1.053 10.175 0.144 0.514 28.201 0.061 0.071
13.50 0.253 0.117 1.046 10.175 0.132 0.509 28.135 0.059 0.067
14.00 0.242 0.110 1.038 10.175 0.121 0.504 28.068 0.057 0.063
14.50 0.232 0.103 1.032 10.175 0.112 0.499 27.998 0.054 0.060
15.00 0.224 0.096 1.026 10.175 0.103 0.495 27.971 0.052 0.056
15.50 0.216 0.090 1.020 10.175 0.095 0.491 27.955 0.051 0.053
16.00 0.208 0.085 1.014 10.175 0.088 0.487 27.939 0.049 0.050
16.50 0.201 0.080 1.009 10.175 0.081 0.485 27.924 0.047 0.048
17.00 0.195 0.074 1.003 10.175 0.076 0.482 27.910 0.046 0.045
17.50 0.190 0.070 0.998 10.175 0.070 0.479 27.897 0.045 0.042
18.00 0.184 0.065 0.996 10.175 0.066 0.477 27.883 0.043 0.040
18.50 0.197 0.062 0.995 10.175 0.062 0.475 27.869 0.043 0.038
19.00 0.175 0.058 0.994 10.175 0.059 0.472 27.857 0.042 0.036
19.50 0.171 0.055 0.993 10.175 0.056 0.470 27.845 0.041 0.034
20.00 0.168 0.051 0.992 10.175 0.053 0.469 27.833 0.040 0.033
20.50 0.154 0.049 0.991 10.175 0.050 0.468 27.821 0.040 0.031
21.00 0.161 0.046 0.990 10.175 0.048 0.468 27.809 0.039 0.030
21.50 0.158 0.043 0.990 10.175 0.046 0.468 27.799 0.038 0.029
22.00 0.155 0.041 0.989 10.175 0.045 0.467 27.788 0.038 0.028
22.50 0.152 0.039 0.988 10.175 0.043 0.467 27.777 0.037 0.027
23.00 0.149 0.037 0.988 10.175 0.042 0.467 27.766 0.036 0.026
23.50 0.146 0.035 0.987 10.175 0.040 0.467 27.757 0.036 0.026
24.00 0.144 0.033 0.986 10.175 0.039 0.466 27.751 0.035 0.025
24.50 0.142 0.031 0.986 10.175 0.038 0.466 27.746 0.035 0.024
25.00 0.140 0.030 0.985 10.175 0.037 0.466 27.740 0.034 0.024
25.50 0.137 0.028 0.985 10.175 0.037 0.466 27.735 0.033 0.023
26.00 0.135 0.027 0.985 10.175 0.036 0.465 27.729 0.033 0.023
26.50 0.134 0.026 0.985 10.175 0.035 0.465 27.725 0.033 0.022
27.00 0.133 0.025 0.984 10.175 0.034 0.465 27.722 0.032 0.022
27.50 0.132 0.024 0.984 10.175 0.034 0.464 27.720 0.032 0.021
28.00 0.131 0.023 0.984 10.175 0.033 0.464 27.717 0.031 0.021
28.50 0.131 0.022 0.984 10.175 0.033 0.464 27.714 0.031 0.020
29.00 0.130 0.022 0.984 10.175 0.032 0.464 27.711 0.031 0.020
29.50 0.129 0.021 0.984 10.175 0.032 0.464 27.709 0.031 0.020
30.00 0.129 0.021 0.984 10.175 0.032 0.464 27.709 0.031 0.020
Setting
Multiple
Current
TCC
138
TCC
139
TCC
140
TCC
141
TCC
142
TCC
151
TCC
152
TCC
161
TCC
162
Non-standard Inverse Time Protection table, TCC 138-162
G-7
Setting
Multiple
Current
TCC
163
TCC
164
TCC
165
TCC
200
TCC
201
TCC
202
1.10 33.228 53.091 84.512 74.687 122.30 125.06
1.50 3.747 18.503 31.451 17.354 27.161 64.047
2.00 1.356 7.916 12.916 10.039 13.506 26.654
2.50 0.720 4.318 5.994 7.583 9.012 15.234
3.00 0.482 2.596 3.199 6.323 6.770 10.004
3.50 0.356 1.715 2.051 5.530 5.410 7.109
4.00 0.276 1.162 1.463 4.985 4.505 5.335
4.50 0.222 0.787 1.102 4.588 3.860 4.154
5.00 0.187 0.556 0.866 4.286 3.380 3.333
5.50 0.161 0.420 0.714 4.044 3.006 2.735
6.00 0.140 0.333 0.602 3.844 2.705 2.286
6.50 0.123 0.272 0.515 3.671 2.456 1.940
7.00 0.109 0.228 0.450 3.533 2.254 1.667
7.50 0.097 0.197 0.397 3.409 2.081 1.448
8.00 0.087 0.174 0.352 3.300 1.931 1.270
8.50 0.078 0.155 0.317 3.206 1.804 1.123
9.00 0.070 0.140 0.287 3.119 1.690 1.000
9.50 0.064 0.127 0.262 3.044 1.591 0.897
10.00 0.058 0.116 0.240 2.974 1.502 0.808
10.50 0.054 0.106 0.221 2.910 1.422 0.732
11.00 0.049 0.098 0.205 2.854 1.353 0.667
11.50 0.046 0.090 0.190 2.797 1.286 0.610
12.00 0.042 0.085 0.178 2.751 1.229 0.560
12.50 0.040 0.080 0.166 2.705 1.176 0.516
13.00 0.037 0.075 0.156 2.660 1.125 0.476
13.50 0.035 0.071 0.145 2.623 1.082 0.441
14.00 0.033 0.068 0.135 2.586 1.040 0.410
14.50 0.031 0.065 0.126 2.549 1.001 0.382
15.00 0.030 0.062 0.117 2.518 0.966 0.357
15.50 0.028 0.059 0.110 2.488 0.933 0.335
16.00 0.027 0.057 0.103 2.458 0.901 0.314
16.50 0.026 0.055 0.096 2.429 0.871 0.295
17.00 0.025 0.053 0.091 2.404 0.845 0.278
17.50 0.023 0.051 0.086 2.380 0.820 0.262
18.00 0.022 0.049 0.081 2.355 0.795 0.248
18.50 0.022 0.048 0.077 2.330 0.772 0.234
19.00 0.021 0.047 0.072 2.310 0.751 0.222
19.50 0.020 0.045 0.069 2.290 0.731 0.211
20.00 0.019 0.044 0.065 2.270 0.712 0.200
20.50 0.019 0.043 0.062 2.249 0.693 0.191
21.00 0.018 0.042 0.059 2.231 0.676 0.182
Non-standard Inverse Time Protection table, TCC 163-202
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
G-8
21.50 0.018 0.040 0.057 2.214 0.660 0.173
22.00 0.018 0.039 0.055 2.198 0.644 0.166
22.50 0.017 0.038 0.053 2.181 0.629 0.159
23.00 0.017 0.037 0.051 2.164 0.614 0.152
23.50 0.017 0.036 0.049 2.149 0.601 0.145
24.00 0.017 0.036 0.047 2.135 0.588 0.139
24.50 0.016 0.035 0.046 2.122 0.576 0.134
25.00 0.016 0.034 0.044 2.108 0.564 0.129
25.50 0.016 0.033 0.043 2.094 0.552 0.124
26.00 0.016 0.033 0.042 2.080 0.541 0.119
26.50 0.015 0.032 0.041 2.068 0.530 0.114
27.00 0.015 0.031 0.040 2.056 0.520 0.110
27.50 0.015 0.031 0.040 2.045 0.510 0.106
28.00 0.014 0.030 0.039 2.034 0.501 0.103
28.50 0.014 0.030 0.039 2.022 0.492 0.099
29.00 0.014 0.029 0.038 2.011 0.482 0.096
29.50 0.014 0.029 0.038 2.001 0.475 0.093
30.00 0.014 0.029 0.038 2.001 0.475 0.093
Setting
Multiple
Current
TCC
163
TCC
164
TCC
165
TCC
200
TCC
201
TCC
202
Non-standard Inverse Time Protection table, TCC 163-202
H-1
Appendix H Communication Settings
This appendix contains a table of setting for each of the
communications port types.
RS232 Communication Port Settings
Setting Description
DISABLED
ENABLED
IN USE
Port Operation
This setting indicates whether the port is DISABLED or ENABLED or ENABLED and IN USE by an application within
the ADVC.
Range: DISABLED, ENABLED, IN USE
(Display only setting)
Driver Communication Driver
Communication driver attached to port e.g. modem driver
This setting is only applicable for ports C and D.
Range: Hayes, RDI, NONE
Factory default is NONE
Mode Mode State
LOCAL/Remote mode of communication assigned to this port.
Range: LOCAL, Remote
A port used by SCADA protocols should use Remote,
WSOS5 or IOEX should be set to LOCAL or Remote depending upon requirements.
Refer to Local/Remote/Hit and Run Mode on page 1 for more information about Remote/LOCAL modes.
Factory default is Port A LOCAL, Port B-D REMOTE
Baud Communications Baud Rate
Range: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 baud.
Factory default is Port A 57600 Baud, Port B 19200 Baud, Port C 9600 Baud, Port D 57600 Baud
Parity Parity
Parity of the communications port
Range: NONE, EVEN, ODD
Factory default is NONE
Stop bits Number of Stop Bits
Number of stop bits appended to transmitted byte
Range: 1, 2
Factory default is 1
RTS RTS Support
When ENABLED, RTS is asserted for Pre-Tx period of time prior to transmission of data as well as Post-Tx period of
time after transmission.
Pre and post transmission RTS is required on most radio modems.
This setting is only applicable for ports C and D.
Range: DISABLED, ENABLED
Factory default is ENABLED
CTS CTS Support
If the modem does not support a Clear To Send (CTS) signal and/or the cabling has no CTS wiring, this setting should
be set to CTS Ignore.
When set to CTS Ignore, the protocol asserts RTS as normal but does not check for a returned CTS input signal.
If the modem supports a Clear To Send (CTS) signal, setting CTS Don't Ignore, allows data to be transmitted only
when CTS is asserted.
This setting is only applicable for ports C and D.
Range: Ignore, Don't Ignore
Factory default is Ignore
DTR DTR Support
When set to ENABLED, DTR is asserted whenever the port is in use.
This setting is only applicable for ports C and D.
Range: DISABLED, ENABLED
Factory default is ENABLED
Table 11: RS232 Communication Port Settings
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
H-2
Pre-Tx Pre-Transmission Period
If RTS support is ENABLED, Pre-Tx is the time delay between asserting RTS and when the message starts.
This setting is only applicable for ports C and D.
Range: 0 to 3000 ms.
Factory default is 250 ms
Post-Tx Post-Transmission Period
If RTS support is ENABLED, Post-Tx is the time after the last character is sent before RTS is negated.
This setting is only applicable for ports C and D.
Range: 0 to 3000 ms.
Factory default is 35 ms
DCD DCD Usage
If the modem does not support a Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal this setting should be set to DCD Ignore.
Even if the modem does support a DCD signal this setting is usually set to DCD Ignore. This is because most point-
point systems using conventional modems run as full duplex so that the DCD is always asserted during normal
operation.
When set to DCD Ignore, the protocol uses any received data to build an incoming packet irrespective of DCD input
signal. Also the protocol will transmit irrespective of the DCD input signal.
If the modem supports a Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal this setting can be set to DCD Don't Ignore. When set to
this mode, the protocol will only read data and build an incoming protocol packet when DCD is asserted. In addition,
the protocol will not transmit when DCD is asserted. This is necessary for multi-dropped systems or ones shared with
voice users or some radio-modems.
This setting is only applicable for ports C and D.
Range: DCD Ignore, DCD Don't Ignore
Factory default is DCD Ignore
CA Delay Collision Avoidance Delay
On a multidrop communications link this setting can be used to provide priority access.
If the controller prepares to transmit and finds the link busy (DCD asserted), it waits until it is no longer busy, then
waits a back off time as follows:
Back off time = CA Delay + (random delay with range 0.0 to CA Delay)
After the back off time the device tries again. If still unsuccessful then the controller will continue in an indefinite loop
until successful.
If the DCD usage is configured to DCD Ignore, the CA Delay time is disabled.
This setting is only applicable for ports C and D.
Range: 0 to 180000 milliseconds
Factory default is 1000 ms
Preamble Preamble Usage
Determines whether the port transmits some preamble characters prior to transmitting a message. The message itself
is not otherwise modified. Some modems require these characters to assist with message reception and
synchronisation at the master station. Start of frame filtering at the master station ensures identification of the
transmitted message.
ENABLED means that the preamble characters are transmitted prior to a message transmission.
DISABLED means that the message is transmitted without any preamble characters.
Range: ENABLED, DISABLED
Factory default is DISABLED
First Char Preamble First Character
This is the first character to be transmitted as a preamble. The character is specified by entering its ASCII code in
hexadecimal format.
Range: is 0 to FF hexadecimal.
Factory default is 0x55
Repeat First Number of Preamble First Characters
This is the number of times the first character will be repeated as part of the preamble.
For example, if all preamble settings are at default values then the preamble sent is 0x55, 0x55, 0x55, 0xFF
Range: 0 to 20.
Factory default is 3
Last Char Last Preamble Character
This is the last char that will be sent as part of the preamble. The character is specified by entering its ASCII code in
hexadecimal format.
Range: is 0 to FF hexadecimal.
Factory default is 0xFF
Setting Description
Table 11: RS232 Communication Port Settings
H-3
RDI Modem Support Settings
RS485 Communication Port Settings.
Setting Description
Msg Attempts Message Retry Attempts
This is the number of complete attempts made to transfer a protocol packet to the radio system. Failure at any stage
in the transfer process will cause another attempt. Once the number of attempts is exhausted the protocol packet is
discarded by RDI. It is then up to the protocol to handle the failure as it would normally if RDI was not in use.
Factory default is 4
ACK2 ON/OFF ACK2 Support
An ACK2 is an acknowledgement that confirms that the protocol packet has been accepted by the receiving EDACS
radio. This type of acknowledgement is optional and can be turned On or Off via this setting. If it ON then CTS is also
used.
Factory default is ON
ACK0 Err Cnt ACK0 Error Count
Counts the number of times that 'ACK0' is not received within 500msec of data transfer request message being sent.
Range: 0 to 2147483648
ACK1 Err Cnt ACK1 Error Count
Counts the number of times that 'ACK1' is not received within 1 second of DATA message being sent.
Range: 0 to 2147483648
ACK2 Err Cnt ACK2 Error Count
Counts the number of times that 'ACK2' is not received from the receiving EDACS radio within 45 seconds of DATA
message being transmitted.
Range: 0 to 2147483648
Table 12: RDI Modem Support Settings
Setting Description
ENABLED
DISABLED
Port Operation
This setting indicates whether the port is DISABLED or ENABLED or ENABLED and IN USE by an application with in
the controller.
Range: DISABLED, ENABLED, IN USE
(Display only setting)
Baud Communications Baud Rate
Range: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 baud.
Factory default is 57600 Baud
Parity Communication Parity
Determines the parity of the communication port.
Range: NONE, EVEN, ODD
Factory default is NONE
Mode Mode State
LOCAL/Remote mode of communication assigned to this port.
Range: LOCAL/Remote
A port used by SCADA protocols should use 'Remote'.
WSOS5 & IOEX should be set to LOCAL or 'Remote' depending upon requirements.
Refer to Local/Remote/Hit and Run Mode on page 1 for more information about LOCAL/Remote modes.
Factory default is Remote
Table 13: RS485 Communication Port Settings
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
H-4
V23 FSK Port Settings
Setting Description
ENABLED
DISABLED
Port Operation
This setting indicates whether the port is DISABLED or ENABLED or ENABLED and IN USE by an application with in
the controller.
Range: DISABLED, ENABLED, IN USE
(Display only setting)
Baud Communications Baud Rate
Not configurable for V23 FSK.
Factory default is 1200 Baud
(Display only setting)
Mode Mode State
LOCAL/Remote mode of communication assigned to this port.
Range: LOCAL/Remote
A port used by SCADA protocols should use 'Remote'.
WSOS5 & IOEX should be set to LOCAL or 'Remote' depending upon requirements.
Refer to Local/Remote/Hit and Run Mode on page 1 for more information about LOCAL/Remote modes.
Factory default is Remote
Parity Communication parity
Determines the parity of the communication port.
Range: NONE, EVEN, ODD
Factory default is NONE
CD
(Carrier Detect)
CD Usage
CD ENABLED If set to this mode, the handler will utilise the V23 ports Carrier Detect input as set in CD if input HIGH/
LOW below, else if CD DISABLED the handler will ignore the Carrier Detect V23 port input.
Range: CD Disabled, CD Invalid
Factory default is CD DISABLED
CD if input LOW
CD if input HIGH
Polarity of CD Signal
This setting determines the sense of an asserted CD input signal from a device connected to the V23 port.
CD when input LOW means that a low input signal will assert Carrier Detect.
CD when input HIGH means that a high input signal will assert Carrier Detect.
When CD is in the asserted state and CD ENABLED the handler will not transmit, instead it will use the use the
Collision Avoidance mechanism as described in CA Delay.
Range: CD when input low, CD when input high.
Factory default is CD when input LOW
Busy Ignore
Busy Don't Ignore
Busy Status Usage
Busy Ignore - When set to this mode, the handler uses any received data to build a packet and the handler is able to
transmit at any time.
Busy Don't Ignore - When set to this mode, the handler will only read data and build packets when the V23 modem
detects busy. In addition, the handler will not transmit when the V23 modem in the busy state, instead it will use the
use the Collision Avoidance mechanism as described in CA Delay. This reduces clashes with voice users.
Range: Busy Ignore, Busy Don't Ignore
Factory default is Busy Ignore
CA Delay Collision Avoidance Delay
On a multidrop communications link this setting can be used to provide a collision avoidance 'back-off' mechanism.
If the controller prepares to transmit and finds the link busy (DCD asserted), it waits until it is no longer busy, then
waits a back off time as follows:
Back off time = CA Delay + (random delay with range 0.0 to CA Delay)
After the back off time the device tries again. If still unsuccessful then the controller will continue in an indefinite loop
until successful.
If the CD usage is configured to CD Disabled then the CA Delay time is disabled.
Range: 0 to 180000 milliseconds
Factory default is 1000 ms
Pre-TX Pre-Transmission Period
Pre-Tx is the time delay between asserting PTT to when the message starts.
Range: 0 to 3000 ms.
Factory default is 250 ms
Post-TX Post-Transmission Period
Post-Tx is the time after the last character is sent before PTT is negated.
Range: 0 to 3000 ms.
Factory default is 35 ms
Table 14: V23 FSK Port Settings
H-5
10Base-T Port Settings
Pre-amble Preamble Usage
Determines whether the port transmits some preamble characters prior to transmitting a message. The message itself
is not otherwise modified. Some modems require these characters to assist with message reception and
synchronisation at the master station. Start of frame filtering at the master station ensures identification of the
transmitted message.
ENABLED means that the preamble characters are transmitted prior to a message transmission.
DISABLED means that the message is transmitted without any preamble characters.
Range: ENABLED, DISABLED
Factory default is DISABLED
First Char Preamble First Character
This is the first character to be transmitted as a preamble. The character is specified by entering its ASCII code in
hexadecimal format.
Range: is 0 to FF hexadecimal.
Factory default is 0x55
Repeat First Number of Preamble First Characters
This is the number of times the first character will be repeated as part of the preamble.
Eg if all preamble settings are at default values then the preamble sent is 0x55, 0x55, 0x55, 0xFF
Range: 0 to 20.
Factory default is 3
Last Char Last Preamble Character
This is the last char that will be sent as part of the preamble. The character is specified by entering its ASCII code in
hexadecimal format.
Range: is 0 to FF hexadecimal.
Factory default is 0xFF
Setting Description
Table 14: V23 FSK Port Settings
Setting
a
Description
ENABLED Port Operation
Not configurable for 10Base-T.
Range: ENABLED, IN USE
Remote LOCAL/Remote Status
Not configurable for 10Base-T.
Factory default is Remote
IP
b
Internet Protocol Address
IP address of controller.
Range: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Factory default is 10.176.x.y where x is 20 + (controller serial number 256) and y is controller serial number modulo
256
Sub
b
Subnet mask
Subnet mask is used when controller is not in DHCP mode.
Range: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Factory default is 255.255.0.0
DHCP
b,
c
DHCP Support
If ENABLED then IP address of controller is automatically determined from an DHCP server.
If DISABLED then IP address is determined via configuration of IP and Subnet mask settings.
Range: ENABLED, DISABLED
Factory default is DISABLED
Table 15: 10Base-T Port Settings
a. All of these settings are read only.
b. If the IP address and Subnet mask settings are blank then the controller has failed to establish a connection with the DHCP server and therefore has no
IP address nor subnet mask. The test for DHCP server is only done on power up. To retry the communication, check the 10base-T connection and cycle the
power to the controller.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
H-6
c. WSOS5 is required for configuration of 10Base-T settings. If DHCP mode is changed then WSOS5 prompts the operator that a controller reset is
required.
Communications Trace Settings
Setting Description
Output Output Port
The port out of which data captured from the Target port is transmitted, except when the Trace application is being
used by WSOS5 to capture communication data.
If Trace port and Target port are the same, a software loopback is created.
If in WSOS5 Controlled mode, the Trace port indicates WSOS5.
Range: NONE, RS232-A, RS232-B, RS232-C, RS232-D, WSOS
Factory default is NONE
INACTIVE/
RUNNING
Trace Application Status
Indicates the current state of the trace application.
To trigger a trace, select RUNNING.
To halt a trace, select INACTIVE
Status will automatically be set to INACTIVE after maximum trace time, Timeout.
Range: RUNNING, INACTIVE
Factory default is INACTIVE
Target Target Port
The port that the Trace application will trace/loop back to when Trace is 'RUNNING'
Range: NONE, RS232-A, RS232-B, RS232-C, RS232-D, V23 FSK, RS485
Factory default is NONE
Timeout Maximum Trace Time
If the trace is not being controlled by WSOS5, Timeout is the maximum time the trace will run during any one trace
session.
Timeout is ignored if the Trace port is controlled by WSOS5.
Range: 1 to 1440 Minutes
Factory default is 15 Minutes
Fmt Format
The format applied to the traced data stream sent to the output port or to WSOS5 when WSOS5 Communications
Capture is Active.
RAW LOOPBACK
Indicates Target port is Looped Back, data is unformatted.
N.B. Fmt reverts to its previous setting after a Trace 'loop back' session.
RAW BINARY
Trace output is unformatted.
HEADER BINARY
An informational header containing: timestamp, traced port name, Tx/Rx indicator, byte count and transmitting
application is pre-pended to each discrete transmit/receive byte group transported through the Target port.
(HEADER BINARY is the only format supported by WSOS5 Communications Capture. Fmt will revert to its previous
setting after a WSOS5 Comms Capture session.
HEADER ASCII
As for HEADER BINARY but the header and data is translated to a space delimited ASCII/HEX character stream.
Factory default is HEADER BINARY
End of Line End of Line Character
Character(s) used for end of line HEADER ASCII trace output.
Range:
CR/LF- Carriage Return / Line Feed (0x0D 0x0A)
CR - Carriage Return (0x0D)
LF - Line Feed (0x0A)
NONE - No end of line termination character
Factory default is CR/LF
Tx Count
a
See Note Below
Transmission Message Count
Count of transmissions by the traced port.
Range: 0 to 2147483648 messages
H-7
Rx Count
a
See Note Below
Receive Message Count
Count of messages received by the traced port.
Range: 0 to 2147483648 messages
Tx Bytes
a
See Note Below
Transmission Byte Count
Count of bytes transmitted by the traced port.
Range: 0 to 2147483648 bytes
Rx Bytes
a
See Note Below
Receive Byte Count
Count of bytes received by the traced port.
Range: 0 to 2147483648 bytes
a. The transmission and receive counters:
- continue between trace sessions on the same target port but are reset to zero upon selection of a different target port.
- can be individually cleared by an operator at any time. To clear a counter press the SELECT key until the desired counter starts flashing, press either the left
or the right arrow key, and then press the Enter key.
- will rollover to zero when the maximum count is reached.
Setting Description
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
H-8
I-1
Appendix I System Status Pages
This appendix shows all the System Status group pages. The top line of
each page is the page title. To the right of the title is a letter which
indicates the display group to which the page belongs. For the System
Status group the letter is S. The next three lines are the data on
display. Most displays have six data fields. These lines are shown in the
following tables.
Typical or default values are shown in the tables. For example, Reclose
Time 0.5 sec is shown for the reclose time setting. When you view the
actual display it would show the actual setting, e.g. Reclose Time 3.0
sec.
1
Where field text differs to indicate different settings e.g. SEF
Protection ON or SEF Protection OFF, all the possible texts are shown,
one below the other. For example, in the table overleaf for the page

the first data field can be either:
LOCAL CONTROL ON, or
Remote Control ON
Where field text differs according to whether the chosen display
language is international or US English, the international English will be
given first, followed by the US English in brackets e.g. SEF (SGF)
Protection ON. For example, in the table overleaf for the page

the second data field is:
E/F (G/F) ON, or E/F (G/F) OFF
and the third data field is:
SEF (SGF) ON, or SEF (SGF) OFF
For explanatory purposes only within this publication, the letters in the
small column to the right of each display text column indicate the type of
data displayed. These have significance as follows:
1. Different default values from those shown may be factory loaded.
O Operator Controlled
D Display Only (i.e. cannot be changed)
P Password Protected (i.e. can only be changed if the password is known)
R Operator Controlled Reset (i.e. resets a field or group of fields)
- - - - - - - - - -OPERATOR SETTINGS 1 - - - - - - - - S
LOCAL CONTROL ON E/F OFF, SEF OFF
Auto Reclose ON NPS OFF
Prot B Active
- - - - - - - - - -OPERATOR SETTINGS 1 - - - - - - - - S
LOCAL CONTROL ON E/F OFF, SEF OFF
Auto Reclose ON NPS OFF
Prot B Active
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
I-2
Trip Flags
Pickup Flags
Operator Settings 1
TRIP FLAGSS
O/C 00-99ABC R LOP00-99ABC R Ext00-99 R
E/F (G/F) 00-99I R
FRQ00-99
a
R R
SEF (SGF) 00-99 R NPS00-99I R OPS0000-9999 R
a. This is a feature only.
PICKUP FLAGSS
O/C 00-99ABCI R LOP00-99ABC R
E/F (G/F) 00-99I R
FRQ00-99
a
R
SEF (SGF) 00-99 R NPS00-99I R OPS0000-9999 R
a. This is a feature only.
OPERATOR SETTINGS 1 S
LOCAL CONTROL ON
Remote Control On
Hit and Run ON
Hit and Run OFF
O

E/F (G/F) OFF, SEF (SGF) OFF
E/F (G/F) ON, SEF (SGF) OFF
E/F (G/F) ON, SEF (SGF) ON
E/F (G/F) ON
E/F (G/F) OFF
The options appearing in this field are
dependent on the SEF (SGF) and E/F (G/F)
Control settings.
O
Auto Reclose OFF
Auto Reclose ON
Protection OFF
a
O NPS OFF
NPS ON
NPS Prot Alarm
O
Lockout D
Protection Auto
b

c
O
Single Shot Active (blank in normal operation)
Prot A, B, , J Active
d O
Reclose 1
Auto A Active
c
D
Reclose 2
Auto B Active
c
D
Reclose 3
a. If {SYSTEM STATUS-OPTIONS 1:Prot OFF Not Allowed} is configured then this option is not shown.
b. Navigation of this field starts with Protection Auto (when configured) to minimise key presses.
c. If {SYSTEN STATUS-OPTIONS 1:APGS Not Allowed} is configured then this option is not shown.
d. One of ten different Protection Groups (A-J) can be active. For example, if Protection Group D is active the display will
read {Prot D Active}.
I-3
Operator settings 2
System settings 1
System settings 2
Switchgear Status
OPERATOR SETTINGS 2 S
Cold Load OFF
Cold Load IDLE
Cold Load NO CHANGE
Cold Load MAX
CLP120min x 2.3 mult
a
O

Demand Period 15 min
Dead Lockout OFF
a. This field is display only when configured as Cold Load OFF.
SYSYTEM SETTINGS 1 S
Lang English (Intl)
Lang English (USA)
Lang English (USA2)
O Display Metric
Display Imperial
O
System Freq 50 Hz
System Freq 60 Hz
P
Date/Time DD/MM/YYYY (MM/DD/YYYY) HH:MM:SS O
SYSTEM SETTINGS 2 S
Options Available
Options Not Availabl
P
SWITCHGEAR STATUS S
Hot Line (Work Tag) OFF
Hot Line (Work Tag) Applied
O SF6 Normal 5.3 psig D
Aux Supply Normal
Aux Supply Fail
D Bty Normal X.XV
Bty Off X.XV
Bty Low Volts X.XV
Bty Overvolt X.XV
D
Switch Connected
Switch Unplugged
D Switch Data Valid
Switch Data Invalid
D
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
I-4
BushingLive/Dead Indication
Phase Voltage and Power Flow
Terminal Designation/Rotation
Radio
BUSHING LIVE/DEAD INDICATION S
A1 Live
A1 Dead
D A2 Live
A2 Dead
D
B1 Live
B1 Dead
D B2 Live
B2 Dead
D
C1 Live
C1 Dead
D C2 Live
C2 Dead
D
PHASE VOLTAGE and POWER FLOW S
LIVE if > 2000V P Supply Timeout 4.0s P
Power Signed
Power Unsigned
P Source 1, Load 2
Source 2, Load 1
P
Display Ph/Ph Volt
Display Ph/Earth (Gnd) Volt
P
TERMINAL DESIGNATION S
A Phase = Bushings U1 & U2 Phasing ABC
Phasing ACB
Phasing BAC
Phasing BCA
Phasing CAB
Phasing CBA
P
B Phase = Bushings V1 & V2
C Phase = Bushings W1 & W2
RADIO S
Radio Supply OFF
Radio Supply ON
O Radio Supply 12V P
Radio Hold 60 min P
I-5
Switchgear Type and Ratings
Switchgear Wear/General Details
Options 1
Options 2
Options 3
SWITCHGEAR TYPE and RATINGS S
D S/N 123456 D
12500A Interruption D Rated 27000 Volts D
630A Continuous D Ops 0081 D
SWITCHGEAR WEAR/GENERAL DETAILS S
U Contact 75.6% D Cubicle S/N 1234 D
V Contact 75.6% D App. Ver A41-02.92 D
W Contact 74.5% D
OPTIONS 1 S
Prot OFF Allowed
Prot OFF Not Allowed
P SEF (SGF) Available
SEF (SGF) Not Avail
E/F OFF Allowed
E/F OFF Not Allowed

P
Seq Comp Available
Seq Comp Not Avail
NPS OFF Allowed
NPS OFF Not Allowed
P
OPTIONS 2 S
Automation OFF
Loop Auto Available
P U/O Freq Available
U/O Freq Not Avail
P
APGS Available
APGS Not Avail
P P
P
OPTIONS 3 S
P Config QK Available
Config QK Not Avail
O
P Gas Interlock ON
Gas Interlock OFF
O
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
I-6
Options 4
Options 5
Quick Key Map selection
IOEX Status
Hit and Run
OPTIONS 4 S
Trace Available
Trace Not Available
DNP3 Available
DNP3 Not Available
RDI Available
RDI Not Available
OPTIONS 5 S
SOM Available
SOM Not Available
Wave Capt Avail
Wave Capt Not Avail
Harmonics Avail
Harmonics Not Avail
QUICK KEY MAP SELECTION S
Text Description of QK1 P Text Description of QK3 P
Text Description of QK2 P Text Description of QK4 P
IOEX Status S
Inputs 1 8 D
Outputs 1 8 D IOEX OK
Invalid Map
Initialising
Unplugged
Wrong Type
D
D
Hit and Run S
Hit/Run Close OFF
Hit/Run Close 10s........120s
P Hit/Run Trip OFF
Hit/Run Trip 10s.........120s
P
I-7
Waveform Capture
Waveform Trigger
Battery Health Test
Waveform Capture S
Wave Capture OFF
Wave Capture ON
P Wcap Window 0.5s
Wcap Window1s
Wcap Window2s
P
Wcap Ratio 0/100
Wcap Ratio 10/90
Wcap Ratio 20/80
Wcap Ratio 30/70
Wcap Ratio 40/60
Wcap Ratio 50/50
Wcap Ratio 60/40
Wcap Ratio 70/30
Wcap Ratio 80/20
Wcap Ratio 90/10
P Capture Now ON
Capture Now OFF
D
Waveform Trigger S
Prot Trip
Manual Trip
Manual Close
Auto Close
Harmonics
- blank -
O Prot Trip
Manual Trip
Manual Close
Auto Close
Harmonics
- blank -
O
Prot Trip
Manual Trip
Manual Close
Auto Close
Harmonics
- blank -
O Prot Trip
Manual Trip
Manual Close
Auto Close
Harmonics
- blank -
O
Prot Trip
Manual Trip
Manual Close
Auto Close
Harmonics
- blank -
O Prot Trip
Manual Trip
Manual Close
Auto Close
Harmonics
- blank -
)
Battery Health Test S
Test Status OFF
Test Status Auto
P Test Off, Ready
Test START
Test ABORT
P
Auto Test 2......31 days
Auto Test Disabled
Auto Test Daily
P Test Time H:MM P
Capacity OK
Capacity Not OK
D 7.2 Ah Battery
12 Ah Battery
)
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
I-8
J-1
Appendix J Measurement Pages
This appendix shows the Measurement Group of pages on the
Operator Control Panel display. Appendix I (page 1) explains the format
of this appendix.
See Power System Measurement on page 9-1. for more information
on measurement functionality.
System Measurements
Current
Voltage
Sequence Voltage
SYSTEM MEASUREMENTS M
Current D Power P 2479 kW D
Voltage Power Q 200 kVAR D
Frequency 50.0 Hz P F 0.93 D
Current M
Ai phase to earth 12700 Volt
D
Bi phase to earth 12700 Volt
D
Ci phase to earth 12700 Volt
D
Source Voltage Load M
Ax phase to earth Unavailable
a
D
Bx phase to earth Unavailable
a
D
Cx phase to earth Unavailable
a
D
Source Voltage Load M
Ax phase to earth Unavailable
a
D
Bx phase to earth Unavailable
a
D
Cx phase to earth Unavailable
a
D
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
J-2
Power
Source Side Voltages When Source side is X and Load side is I.
Load Side Voltages When Source side is X and Load side is I.
Supply Outages
Monthly Maximum Demand
Source Voltage Load M
Ax phase to earth Unavailable
a
D
Bx phase to earth Unavailable
a
D
Cx phase to earth Unavailable
a
D
SOURCE SIDE VOLTAGES
a
M
Ax Bx phase to phase Unavailable
a
D
Bx Cx phase to phase Unavailable
a
D
Cx Ax phase to phase Unavailable
a
D
a. Standard U-Series without external cvts.
LOAD SIDE VOLTAGES M
Ai Bi phase to phase 22000 Volt D
Bi Ci phase to phase 22000 Volt D
Ci Ai phase to phase 22000 Volt D
SUPPLY OUTAGES M
Measure Outages OFF
Measure Outages ON
P Outage Duration 60 s P
Source outages 2 R Duration
Unavailable
4h14m56s R
Load outages 3 R Duration
Unavailable
6h23m24s R
MONTHLY MAXIMUM DEMAND M
Jan/2001 total 28865 kWh D
peak period 07 / 01 / 2001 17:15:00 D
peak demand 31141 kW 0.93 PF D
J-3
Weekly Maximum Demand
Maximum Demand Indicator
WEEKLY MAXIMUM DEMAND M
Week ending 10 / 01 / 2001 total 7565 kWh D
peak period 07 / 01 / 2001 17:15:00 D
peak demand 31141 kW 0.93 PF D
MAXIMUM DEMAND INDICATOR M
A 0A Max 0A 01/01 00:00:00:00 R
B 0A Max 0A 01/01 00:00:00:00 R
C 0A Max 0A 01/01 00:00:00:00 R
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
J-4
K-1
Appendix K Protection Pages
This appendix shows all the Protection Group pages on the Operator
Control Panel display. Appendix I (page I-1) explains the format of this
appendix. See Protection Features on page 8-1. for more information
on protection operation.
Protection Setting 1 (A-J)
Protection Setting 2 (A-J)
Protection Setting 3 (A-J)
PROTECTION SETTING 1 (A J) P
Group A J Displayed P
Copy OFF
a
Copy from # to A
Copy from # to B
Copy from # to C
Copy from # to D
Copy from # to E
Copy from # to F
Copy from # to G
Copy from # to H
Copy from # to I
Copy from # to J
Copy from # to ALL (except #)
P
Copy # Incomplete
b
Copy ALL Incomplete
Phase Trip 200 Amp P Earth Trip 40 Amp P
Phase Threshold 1.1 P Earth Threshold 1.1 P
a. Use SELECT key to scroll through the options. When either the MENU or ENTER key is pressed, the copy is performed
and the field defaults to the Copy OFF display.
b. Advises failure of the copy system.
PROTECTION SETTING 2 (A J) P
NPS Trip 40 Amp P Seq Reset Time 30s P
NPS Threshold 1.1 P Flt Reset Time 50ms P
NPS Trips to Lockout 1 P SS Reset Time 1s P
PROTECTION SETTING 3 (A J) P
SEF Trip 4 Amp P
Live Load Block OFF
a
Live Load Block ON
P
SEF Trips Lockout 1 P Maximum Time OFF
Maximum Time 2.0s
P
Trips to Lockout 4 P Sequence Control OFF
Sequence Control ON
P
a. In order for this function to work correctly, the unit must be programmed with the correct Power Flow direction
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
K-2
Protection Setting 4 (A-J)
Protection Setting 5 (A-J)
Directional Blocking 1
Directional Blocking 2 The description of the fields shown in the display page 2A are shown
below. Both fields are Password Protected.
PROTECTION SETTING 4 (A J) P
High Lockout OFF
High Lockout ON
P Loss Phase Prot OFF
Loss Phase Prot ON
Loss Phase Prot Alm
P
High Lockout 5000A P Phase Lost @ 10000V P
Activation Trip 1
Activation Trip 2
Activation Trip 3
Activation Trip 4
P Phase Lost 10.0s P
PROTECTION SETTING 5 (A J) P
Inrush OFF
Inrush ON
P Cold Load OFF
Cold Load ON
P
Inrush Time 0.10s P Cold Load Time 120m P
Inrush Mult x 4.0 P Cold Load Mult x 2.0 P
DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 1
a

P
Phase: Trip Fwd&Rev
Phase: Trip Rev
Phase: Trip Fwd
P Low V Block OFF
Low V Block ON
P
Earth: Trip Fwd&Rev
Earth: Trip Rev
Earth: Trip Fwd
P Low Vo Block OFF
Low Vo Block ON
P
SEF: Trip Fwd&Rev
SEF: Trip Rev
SEF: Trip Fwd
P Low Vo Block OFF
Low Vo Block ON
P
a. The Directional Blocking pages are not displayed if {SYSTEM STATUS OPTIONS 2: DIRB Not Available} IS
SET.
Field Explanation
Phase Characteristic Angle 45 Deg Sets the characteristic angle for phase trip
blocking.
Default is 45 deg
Earth Characteristic Angle -180 Deg
Sets the characteristic angle for earth trip
blocking.
Default is -180 deg
K-3
Directional Blocking 3 .
Field Explanation
Phase: Trip Fwd
Phase: Trip Rev
Phase: Trip Fwd&Rev
Controls the tripping direction for Phase protection.
Default is Phase: Trip Fwd&Rev
Earth:Trip Fwd
Earth: Trip Rev
Earth: Trip Fwd&Rev
Controls the tripping direction for Earth protection.
Default is Earth: Trip Fwd&Rev
SEF: Trip Fwd
SEF: Trip Rev
SEF: Trip Fwd&Rev
Controls the tripping direction for SEF protection.
Default is SEF: Trip Fwd&Rev
Phase: Low V Block OFF
Phase: Low V Block ON
This field determines the action that will occur when
the polarising phase/earth voltage is below 500V.
When set to Low V Block ON all phase overcurrent
trips will be blocked if the line-earth voltage is below
500 V on all three phases. If Low V Block OFF is set
then the phase overcurrent faults will trip irrespective
of direction if the line-earth voltage on all three phases
is below 500 V.
Default is Phase: Low V Block OFF
Earth: Low Vo Block OFF
Earth: Low Vo Block ON
This field determines the action that will occur when
the polarising residual voltage Vo voltage is less than
the user-set minimum Vo. When set to Low Vo Block
ON all Earth overcurrent trips will be blocked if the
residual voltage is less than the user-set minimum Vo.
If Low Vo Block OFF is set then the Earth overcurrent
faults will trip irrespective of direction if the residual
voltage is less than the user-set minimum.
Default is Earth: Low Vo Block OFF
SEF: Low Vo Block OFF
SEF: Low Vo Block ON
This field determines the action that will occur when
the polarising residual voltage Vo voltage is less than
the user-set minimum Vo. When set to Low Vo Block
ON all SEF overcurrent trips will be blocked if the
residual voltage is less than the user-set minimum Vo.
If Low Vo Block OFF is set then the SEF overcurrent
faults will trip irrespective of direction if the residual
voltage is less than the user-set minimum.
Default is SEF: Low Vo Block OFF
DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 2
a
P
Phase Characteristic Angle45 Deg P
Earth Characteristic Angle -180 Deg P
a. The Directional Blocking pages are not displayed if {SYSTEM STATUS OPTIONS 2: DIRB Not Available} IS
SET.
Field
Explanation
a
Nom P-E Volts 6.3kV
Sets the nominal system phase to earth voltage. This
is used to calculate the Vo % thresholds.
Default is 6.3kV
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
K-4
Under/Over Frequency Protection
1
V
ZPS
Balance ENABLED
V
ZPS
Balance DISABLED
V
ZPS
Balance Paused
V
ZPS
Balancing
Shows the status of the residual voltage dynamic
balancing process, and allows the operator to enable
or disable residual voltage balancing.
V
ZPS
Balance Disabled means that balancing is
OFF.
V
ZPS
Balance Paused means no balancing is
taking place.
V
ZPS
Balancing means that phase balancing is
taking place (up to 20% of Nom P-E Volts).
Default is disabled
Min Earth Vo This field allows the user to set the Low Vo level. This
level is specified as a percentage of the nominal
system phase to Earth voltage.
Default and minimum value is 5%
Min SEF Vo This field allows the user to set the Low Vo level. This
level is specified as a percentage of the nominal
system phase to Earth voltage.
Default and minimum value is 5%
High Vo Alarm
DISABLED
High Vo Alarm 5s
Controls the High Vo alarm. Setting a time enables
the alarm. Setting disable, disables the alarm.
Default is DISABLED
High Vo Alarm OFF
High Vo Alarm ON
This is display indication of the High Vo alarm status
a. Different default values may be factory loaded.
Field
Explanation
a
DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 3
a
P
Nom P-E Volts 6.3kV P Vo Balance DISABLED
Vo Balance ENABLED
Vo Balance Paused
Vo Balancing
P
P
D
D
Min Earth Vo 20% P Min SEF Vo 5% P
High Vo DISABLED
High Vo 5s
P High Vo Alarm OFF
High Vo Alarm ON
D
a. The Directional Blocking pages are not displayed if {SYSTEM STATUS OPTIONS 2: DIRB Not Available} IS SET.
UNDER / OVER FREQUENCY PROTECTION 1
a
(A - J)
P
U / F Trip OFF
U / F Trip ON
P O / F Trip OFF
O / F Trip ON
P
U / F Trip at 49.0Hz P After 4 cycles P
O / F Trip at 52.0Hz P After 50 cycles P
a. CAPM 5 feature only.
K-5
Under/Over Frequency Protection
2
Phase Protection Trip
Phase Single Shot Protection Trip
UNDER / OVER FREQUENCY PROTECTION 2
a
(A - J)
P
U / F Normal 49.5Hz P O / F Normal 50.5Hz P
Low V Inhibit 5000V P
Normal Freq Close OFF
Normal Freq Close ON After 60 secs
This display only appears if the Normal
Frequency Close is ON.
P
a. CAPM 5 feature only.
PHASE PROTECTION TRIP NUMBER 1, 2, 3, 4 (A J) P
IEC255 Curves (1, 2 or 3)
Definite Time
Instantaneous Only
IEEE Curves (1, 2 or 3)
User Defined Curve (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
User Defined Curves Not Set
Additional Curve Selection
a
P Time Multiplier 1.00
1.00s
Time Multiplier 1.00
Time Multiplier 1.00
P
No Instantaneous
Instant Mult x 1.0
P Reclose Time 1.0s
Reclose time not available on trip 4
P
Minimum 0.00s P Additional 0.00s P
a. See Appendices for the available curves.
PHASE SINGLE SHOT PROTECTION TRIP (A J) P
IEC255 Curves (1, 2 or 3)
Definite Time
Instantaneous Only
IEEE Curves (1, 2 or 3)
User Defined Curve (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
User Defined Curves Not Set
Additional Curve Selection
a
P Time Multiplier 1.00
1.00s
Time Multiplier 1.00
Time Multiplier 1.00
P
No Instantaneous
Instant Mult x 1.0
P
Minimum 0.00s P Additional 0.00s P
a. See Appendices for the available curves.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
K-6
Phase Work Tag Protection Trip
Earth Protection Trip
Earth Single Shot Protection Trip
PHASE WORK TAG PROTECTION TRIP (A J) P
IEC255 Curves (1, 2 or 3)
Definite Time
Instantaneous Only
IEEE Curves (1, 2 or 3)
User Defined Curve (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
User Defined Curves Not Set
Additional Curve Selection
a
P Time Multiplier 1.00
1.00s
Time Multiplier 1.00
Time Multiplier 1.00
P
No Instantaneous
Instant Mult x 1.0
P
Minimum 0.00s P Additional 0.00s P
a. See Appendices for the available curves.
EARTH PROTECTION TRIP NUMBER 1, 2, 3, 4 (A J) P
IEC255 Curves (1, 2 or 3)
Definite Time
Instantaneous Only
IEEE Curves (1, 2 or 3)
User Defined Curve (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
User Defined Curves Not Set
Additional Curve Selection
a
P Time Multiplier 1.00
1.00s
Time Multiplier 1.00
Time Multiplier 1.00
P
No Instantaneous
Instant Mult x 1.0
P SEF Definite 5.0s P
Minimum 0.00s P Additional 0.00s P
a. See Appendices A, B and C, for the available curves.
EARTH SINGLE SHOT PROTECTION TRIP (A J) P
IEC255 Curves (1, 2 or 3)
Definite Time
Instantaneous Only
IEEE Curves (1, 2 or 3)
User Defined Curve (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
User Defined Curves Not Set
Additional Curve Selection
a
P Time Multiplier 1.00
1.00s
Time Multiplier 1.00
Time Multiplier 1.00
P
No Instantaneous
Instant Mult x 1.0
P SEF Definite 5.0s P
Minimum 0.00s P Additional 0.00s P
a. See Appendices for the available curves.
K-7
Earth Work Tag Protection Trip
NPS Protection Trip
NPS Single Shot Protection Trip
EARTH WORK TAG PROTECTION TRIP (A J) P
IEC255 Curves (1, 2 or 3)
Definite Time
Instantaneous Only
IEEE Curves (1, 2 or 3)
User Defined Curve (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
User Defined Curves Not Set
Additional Curve Selection
a
P Time Multiplier 1.00
1.00s
Time Multiplier 1.00
Time Multiplier 1.00
P
No Instantaneous
Instant Mult x 1.0
P SEF Definite 5.0s P
Minimum 0.00s P Additional 0.00s P
a. See Appendices for the available curves.
NPS PROTECTION TRIP NUMBER 1, 2, 3, 4 (A J) P
IEC255 Curves (1, 2 or 3)
Definite Time
Instantaneous Only
IEEE Curves (1, 2 or 3)
User Defined Curve (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
User Defined Curves Not Set
Additional Curve Selection
a
P Time Multiplier 1.00
1.00s
Time Multiplier 1.00
Time Multiplier 1.00
P
No Instantaneous
Instant Mult x 1.0
P
Minimum 0.00s P Additional 0.00s P
a. See Appendices A, B and C, for the available curves.
NPS SINGLE SHOT PROTECTION TRIP (A-J) P
IEC255 Curves (1, 2 or 3)
Definite Time
Instantaneous Only
IEEE Curves (1, 2 or 3)
User Defined Curve (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
User Defined Curves Not Set
Additional Curve Selection
a
P Time Multiplier 1.00
1.00s
Time Multiplier 1.00
Time Multiplier 1.00
P
No Instantaneous
Instant Mult x 1.0
P
Minimum 0.00s P Additional 0.00s P
a. See Appendices A, B and C, for the available curves.
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
K-8
NPS Work Tag Protection Trip
NPS WORK TAG PROTECTION TRIP (A-J) P
IEC255 Curves (1, 2 or 3)
Definite Time
Instantaneous Only
IEEE Curves (1, 2 or 3)
User Defined Curve (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
User Defined Curves Not Set
Additional Curve Selection
a
P Time Multiplier 1.00
1.00s
Time Multiplier 1.00
Time Multiplier 1.00
P
No Instantaneous
Instant Mult x 1.0
P
Minimum 0.00s P Additional 0.00s P
a. See AppendicesD,E and F, for the available curves.
L-1
Appendix L Automation Pages
This appendix shows the Automation Group of pages on the Operator
Control Panel (OCP). Appendix I (page 1) explains the format of this
appendix.
See Automation on page 12-1. for more information on automation
functionality.
Loop Automation Status
Loop Automation Configuration
LOOP AUTOMATION STATUS A
Loop Auto OFF P Tie ACR P
Loop Auto ON P
LOOP AUTO TURNED OFF BY OPERATOR ACTION
MUST BE ON FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION
D
LOOP AUTOMATION CONFIGURATION 1 A
Tie ACR P AutoRestore OFF P
TieRestore Oneway P
Loop Auto Time 30s P
LOOP AUTOMATION CONFIGURATION 2 A
AutoRes Avail
AutoRes Not Avail
P
LOP/Loop Unlinked P
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
L-2
M-1
Appendix M List of Events
Each event falls into one or more categories as shown in the Category
column of the main table below. The categories are described as
follows:
Category Abbreviation Description
Protection PRTN A general grouping of all protection related
events.
Controller CTRL A general grouping of all controller hardware
related events.
Switchgear SWGR All messages from Switchgear.
Network NWRK A general grouping of all electrical system
events.
Power Quality PQ All quality of supply messages.
Windows
Switchgear
Operating
System 5
WSOS All setting changes with source WSOS5 are
shown.
Operator
Control Panel
OCP All setting changes with source OCP are
shown.
Protocol PTCL All setting changes and system status
messages that are SCADA protocol related are
shown.
Input/Output
Expander 2
IOEX All setting changes and system status
messages that are IOEX2 related are shown.
Settings All setting changes with source WSOS, Panel,
Protocol or IOEX are shown.
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
- blank - Quick Key function or Waveform Capture Trigger Setting. See Waveform Capture on
page 11-4.
N U C V CTRL PQ
## Contact < 20% Amount of Contact Life remaining is low. Less than 20%. N U SWGR
## Dead A terminal changed from live to dead. N U C V NWRK
## Live A terminal changed from dead to live. N U C V NWRK
#######sec Definite Trip definite time setting (Phase, Earth, NPS, Work Tag, Single Shot). See Fail to Operate
Under Protection on page 8-27.
N U C V PRTN
12V Rail Failure 12V supply rail failed. N U C V CTRL
SWGR
A/B/C ### Amp The phase and current of the maximum demand. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
A/B/C dd/mm/yy
hh:mm:ss
The time and phase of the maximum demand. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
A/B/C Max NN Amp Following pickup of the overcurrent protection element on A, B or C phase, the maximum
fault current recorded was NN Amps. This event was logged only after the current fell back
below the phase setting current. See Protection Elements on page 8-9.
N U C V PRTN
A/B/C Phase LOST Loss of supply occurred on this phase. N U C V PRTN
A/B/C/E/NPS ## Amp Current measured at time of trip. See Current Operated Protection Elements on page 8-
10.
N U C V PRTN
ACK2 ON/OFF On/Off for Radio Data Interface(RDI) acknowledgement at remote radio. N U C V PTCL
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
M-2
Additional #######s Additional time to trip in seconds. Added to the associated protection curve. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Advcload Reset WSOS5's ADVC Loader reset the controller. N U C V CTRL
After #### O/F cyc An over frequency protection trip would occur after this number of frequency cycles. N U C V PRTN
After #### U/F cyc An under frequency protection trip would occur after this number of frequency cycles. N U C V PRTN
Analog Flag ON/OFF For DNP3, determines whether or not a byte containing the status of the analog was
included with the reported Value. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol
Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Analog Size 16/32 bit For DNP3, determines the size of the default analog objects. Please refer to the
manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No:
ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Analog Time ON/OFF For DNP3, determines whether or not a time tag was included with analog change of state
events Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced
Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146.
N U C V PTCL
APGS Change ###s Automatic protection group selection change time. See Protection Groups on page 8-2. N U C V PRTN
APGS Not/Available Automatic protection group selection feature not available or available. See Protection
Groups on page 8-2.
N U C V PRTN
APGS ON/OFF Automatic protection group selection ON or OFF. See Protection Groups on page 8-2. N U C V PRTN
Apl Cf TO #######ms For DNP3, determines the application confirm timeout. Please refer to the manufacturers
DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Apl Frag Size #### For DNP3, determines the maximum size of the application layer fragment that can be sent
at any one time. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for
Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
App. Ver ######### Controller software Version number. See Software Version Covered by this Manual on
page 2-1.
N U C V CTRL
Auto Close Waveform Capture Trigger On Auto Close. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
Auto ON/OFF Automatic Reclose ON/OFF selected for a Quick Key. See Quick Keys on page 5-4. N U C V CTRL
Auto Reclose OFF Auto Reclose was turned OFF by a local or remote operator. See Definition of Local or
Remote User on page 7-1.
N U C V PRTN
Auto Reclose ON Auto Reclose was turned ON by a local or remote operator. See Definition of Local or
Remote User on page 7-1.
N U C V PRTN
Auto Restore ####s Directional protection automatic restore time. See Directional Protection Operation on
page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Automatic Reclose The ACR was automatically re-closed following a protection trip. See Auto Reclosing on
page 8-28.
N U C V PRTN
AutoRes. Not Avail For loop automation, automatic restore feature not made an available option. See Auto-
Restoration Option on page 12-2.
N U C V PRTN
AutoRestore Avail For loop automation, automatic restore feature made an available option. See Auto-
Restoration Option on page 12-2.
N U C V PRTN
AutoRestore ON/OFF For loop automation or directional protection, automatic restoration of supply was ON or
OFF. See Auto-Restoration Option on page 12-2.
N U C V PRTN
Aux Supply Fail The auxiliary power supply failed. See Auxiliary Power Source on page 4-1. N U C V CTRL
Aux Supply Normal The auxiliary power supply became normal. See Auxiliary Power Source on page 4-1. N U C V CTRL
Aux Supply Overvolt The auxiliary power supply exceeded its threshold Voltage. See Auxiliary Power Source
on page 4-1.
N U C V CTRL
Battery High The battery Voltage was too high. This could only occur if there was a battery charger
hardware failure. If this event occurs the equipment may require maintenance. Refer to the
manufacturers ACR Installation and Maintenance Guide, supplied with the equipment and
contact the Manufacturer or Distributor for advice.
N U C V CTRL
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
M-3
Battery Low The battery Voltage was below the low battery Voltage setting. This can also be a reason
for an operation denied. Refer to the manufacturers ACR Installation and Maintenance
Guide, supplied with the equipment.
N U C V CTRL
SWGR
Battery Normal The battery was in the normal range. Refer to the manufacturers ACR Installation and
Maintenance Guide, supplied with the equipment.
N U C V CTRL
Battery OFF The battery was not connected. Refer to the manufacturers ACR Installation and
Maintenance Guide, supplied with the equipment.
N U C V CTRL
Baud ##### Port baud rate changed. See Port Details on page 10-1. N U C V PTCL
Binary Output ON/OFF For DNP3, determines whether binary outputs are included in an integrity poll. Please refer
to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No:
ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Binary Time ON/OFF For DNP3, determines whether or not a time tag was included for change of state events.
Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced
Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Busy (Don't) Ignore Whether to use the V23 Busy signal for Tx/Rx messages. See Configuring V23 FSK Port
Settings on page 10-6.
N U C V PTCL
C# Delay ####s For DNP3, maximum class notification delay in seconds an event was held before an
unsolicited response was triggered. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol
Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146.
N U C V PTCL
C# Max Count # For DNP3, unsolicited response class notification maximum count that must have occurred
before an unsolicited response message was triggered. Please refer to the manufacturers
DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146.
N U C V PTCL
CA Delay #####ms Port transmit collision avoidance delay. See Communications on page 10-1. N U C V PTCL
Cap Charge status Logged if a trip/close request was denied due to a capacitor inverter problem. Where
status was the current status of the inverter, for example "Cap Charge Resting". Refer to
the Maintenance chapter of the manufacturers ACR Installation and Maintenance Guide,
supplied with the equipment.
N U CTRL
SWGR
Cap Charging Warning that the capacitor was charging. Unable to be used in an operation. Refer to the
Maintenance chapter of the manufacturers ACR Installation and Maintenance Guide,
supplied with the equipment.
N U CTRL
SWGR
Cap failure mode Trip and/or close capacitors did not charge correctly. Where failure mode, was the cause of
the failure. For example, "CAP Excess Closes". Refer to the Maintenance chapter of the
manufacturers ACR Installation and Maintenance Guide, supplied with the equipment.
N U CTRL
SWGR
Cap Resting Warning that inverter was resting from capacitor charging. This can occur after an
excessive number of operations. Refer to the Maintenance chapter of the manufacturers
ACR Installation and Maintenance Guide, supplied with the equipment.
N U CTRL
Capture Now ON/OFF Waveform capture was set ON or OFF. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
CD DISABLED Transmission on V23 not blocked when carrier was detected. N U C V PTCL
CD ENABLED Transmission on V23 blocked when carrier was detected. N U C V PTCL
CD if input HIGH When CD input was HIGH then the V23 carrier detect was asserted. N U C V PTCL
CD if input LOW When CD input was LOW then the V23 carrier detect was asserted. N U C V PTCL
CFG Hist Time ## Configurable history sample time. N U C V CTRL
Char Angle #### Deg Characteristic angle in degrees between Voltage and current. See Directional Protection
Operation on page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Close Block Reason for a close operation being denied. N U C V SWGR
CTRL
Close Blocking OFF Close blocking was disabled. The ACR would now close when requested. N U C V CTRL
Close Blocking ON The ACR was prevented from closing. N U C V CTRL
Close Coil Connect The Close solenoid isolate switch on the operator control panel was changed to the Enable
position.
N U C V SWGR
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
M-4
Close Coil Disconn The Close solenoid isolate switch on the operator control panel was changed to the Isolate
position.
N U C V CTRL
SWGR
CLP Time ###min User change to operational cold load time in minutes. N U C V PRTN
Cold Load Quick Key configured for Cold Load option. See Quick Keys on page 5-4. N U C V CTRL
Cold Load Mult x### User cold load multiplier Value. N U C V PRTN
Cold Load ON/OFF Cold load pickup was enabled or disabled. N U C V PRTN
Cold Load Time ###m User set cold load time in minutes. N U C V PRTN
Conf Menu Not/Avail Configurable menu feature available or not available. N U C V CTRL
Config QK Not/Avail Configurable quick key maps are available or not available. N U C V CTRL
CTS Don't/Ignore For a port with handshaking lines, whether to ignore or use the clear to send signal. See
Communications on page 10-1.
N U C V PTCL
Cubicle S/N ###### Cublicle serial number. N U C V CTRL
DCB OPEN/CLOSED Dummy circuit break open or closed. Used for SCADA testing. See Communications on
page 10-1.
N U C V PTCL
DCD Don't/Ignore Whether to ignore or use Data Carrier Detect signal. See Communications on page 10-1. N U C V PTCL
DD/MM Display format of Day/Month. See Operator Settings on page 5-3. N U C V CTRL
Dead Lockout Switchgear would not reclose unless one or more terminals were live. See Lockout on
page 8-29.
N U C V PRTN
Dead Lockout ON/OFF Dead Lockout feature was enabled or disabled. Prevent reclose unless one or more
terminals are live. See Lockout on page 8-29.
N U C V PRTN
Demand Period ##min Demand logging sample period Value in minutes. N U C V CTRL
Dir Blocking ON/OFF Directional blocking feature enabled or disabled. See Directional Protection on page 8-
13.
N U C V PRTN
Dir Protection ON/OFF Directional protection feature enabled or disabled.See Directional Protection on page 8-
13.
N U C V PRTN
DirP Auto Restore Directional protection automatic restoration of supply. See Directional Protection on
page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
DISABLED/ENABLED Port was enabled or disabled. See Enabling/Disabling Communication Ports on page 10-
1.
N U C V PTCL
Display Imperial Display configured for imperial measurements (eg. psi). See Operator Settings on
page 5-3.
N U C V CTRL
Display Metric Display configured for metric measurements (eg. kPa). See Operator Settings on page 5-
3.
N U C V CTRL
Display Ph/Earth V The Voltage measurement page was set to display phase to earth Voltages.See Power
System Measurement on page 9-1.
N U C V CTRL
Display Ph/Ph Volt The Voltage measurement page was set to display phase to phase Voltages. See Power
System Measurement on page 9-1.
N U C V CTRL
DL Cf Rqd ### For DNP3, whether datalink confirm was required never, sometimes or always. Please
refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller,
Part No: ADC01-DOC-146.
N U C V PTCL
DL Cf TO #####ms For DNP3, datalink confirm timeout period. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3
Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146.
N U C V PTCL
DL Max Retries #### For DNP3, datalink maximum retry count. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3
Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146.
N U C V PTCL
DNP Address ##### DNP3 Protocol Station Address. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol
Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146.
N U C V PTCL
DNP Mapping
Changed
DNP3 Point Mapping was changed. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol
Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146.
N U C V PTCL
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
M-5
DNP3 Not/Avail DNP3 protocol available or not available. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3
Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146.
N U C V PTCL
DNP3 Trip/Close Req DNP3 protocol trip/close request. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol
Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146.
N U C V SWGR
Driver ############ Driver selected for a port. This refers to another communications layer outside the
protocol. See Communications on page 10-1.
N U C V PTCL
DTR ENABLED/
DISABLED
RS232 port Data Terminal Ready signal disabled/enabled. See Configuring RS-232 Port
Settings on page 10-4.
N U C V PTCL
E Max NN Amp Following pickup of the overcurrent protection element on earth or SEF, the maximum fault
current recorded was NN Amps. This event was logged only after the current fell back
below the earth setting current. See Protection Elements on page 8-9.
N U C V PRTN
E/F OFF Not/Allowed Whether earth fault protection was allowed to be turned OFF. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Earth Dir Arm An earth protection pickup occurred and tripping was enabled in the faulted direction. The
trip could take place as normal. This event can only occur with Directional Blocking ON.
See Directional Protection on page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Earth Dir Block An earth protection pickup occurred but tripping was blocked in the faulted direction. The
ACRACR would not trip. This event can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See
Directional Protection on page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Earth Low Vzps An Earth overcurrent trip occurred with a low Vzps condition present. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Earth Low Vzps Arm An earth protection pickup occurred and tripping was enabled because the residual C
Voltage (V
ZPS
) was less than the user-specified level and Low V
ZPS
blocking was OFF.
The trip could take place as normal. This event can only occur with Directional Blocking
ON. See Directional Protection on page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Earth Low Vzps Blk An earth protection pickup occurred but tripping was blocked because the residual Voltage
(V
ZPS
) was less than the user-specified level and Low V
ZPS
blocking was ON. The ACR
would not trip. This event can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See Directional
Protection on page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Earth Low Vzps Fwd/
Rev/Ignore
Set the fault direction for an earth protection pickup or ignore. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Earth Prot Quick Key configured for Earth Protection. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V CTRL
Earth Prot OFF Earth fault protection was turned OFF by a local or remote operator. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Earth Prot ON Earth fault Protection was turned ON by a local or remote operator. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Earth Prot Trip A protection trip was generated by the Earth overcurrent protection element. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Earth Threshold ### Earth Protection Curve current multiplier. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Earth Trip #### Amp Earth current measured on trip. See Protection Elements on page 8-9. N U C V PRTN
End of Line CR For a communications trace, an end of line was a carriage return character. See
Communications on page 10-1.
N U C V PTCL
End of Line CR/LF For a communications trace, an end of line was a carriage return followed by a linefeed
character. See Communications on page 10-1.
N U C V PTCL
End of Line LF For a communications trace, an end of line was a linefeed character. See
Communications on page 10-1.
N U C V PTCL
End of Line NONE For a communications trace, there was no end of line. See Communications on page 10-
1.
N U C V PTCL
End of Sequence The end of the protection sequence was reached. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Excess Pickups Trip Trip due excessive number of pickups. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
External Prot Trip External protection trip. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
M-6
Fault Reset #####ms Protection element fault reset time. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Feeder ACR Feeder ACR type defined for loop automation. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
First Char ## Preamble first character on this communications port. See Communications on page 10-
1.
N U C V PTCL
Fmt ASCII-HEX Communications trace format was ASCII of Hexadecimal. See Communications on
page 10-1.
N U C V PTCL
Fmt ASCII-HEX VT100 Communications trace format was ASCII of Hexadecimal with VT100 terminal display
controls. See Communications on page 10-1.
N U C V PTCL
Fmt HEADER BINARY Communications trace format configured to a header and binary data. See
Communications on page 10-1.
N U C V PTCL
Fmt RAW BINARY Communications trace format was unchanged. See Communications on page 10-1. N U C V PTCL
Fmt RAW LOOPBACK Communications trace format was replying with the characters received. See
Communications on page 10-1.
N U C V PTCL
Fwd AutoReclose ON/
OFF
Forward directional protection automatic reclose enabled or disabled. See Directional
Protection on page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Fwd AutoRestore OFF Auto Restore was turned OFF for the forward protection group by a local or remote
operator. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Fwd AutoRestore ON Auto Restore was turned ON for the forward protection group by a local or remote
operator. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Fwd Earth Blocked Directional protection blocked on forward earth current. See Directional Protection on
page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Fwd Earth Prot Trip Protection trip on forward flowing earth current. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Fwd NPS Blocked Directional protection blocked on forward negative phase sequence current. See
Directional Protection on page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Fwd NPS Prot Trip Protection trip on forward flowing negative phase sequence current. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Fwd Phase Blocked Directional protection blocked on forward phase current. See Directional Protection on
page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Fwd Phase Prot Trip Protection trip on forward flowing phase current. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Fwd SEF Blocked Directional protection blocked on forward sensitive earth fault current. See Directional
Protection on page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Fwd SEF Prot Trip Protection trip on forward flowing sensitive earth fault current. See Sensitive Earth Fault
(SEF) Elements on page 8-11.
N U C V PRTN
Fwd Sequence Adv Directional protection sequence advance in the forward direction. See Directional
Protection on page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Gas Interlock Not/Avail Low gas interlock available or not available. N CTRL
Gas Interlock ON/OFF Low gas interlock was set ON or OFF. N CTRL
Gas Press Invalid An operation was attempted with an invlaid gas pressure. N SWGR
CTRL
Gas Press Low This event was recorded after an operation was attempted with sulphur hexaflouride (SF6)
gas pressure low and Gas Low Lockout ON.
N SWGR
CTRL
Group # Displayed Panel protection group displayed. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V CTRL
H/A Alm ON Time ##s Harmonic analysis time to alarm ON. See Harmonic Analysis on page 11-2. N U C V PQ
H/A Logging ## mins Harmonic analysis logging period. See Harmonic Analysis on page 11-2. N U C V PQ
Hardware Failure Problem with controller hardware. N U C V CTRL
Harmonics Waveform capture to trigger on harmonics. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
Harmonics Not/Avail Harmonic analysis available or not available. See Harmonic Analysis on page 11-2. N U C V PQ
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
M-7
Harmonics ON/OFF Harmonic analysis ON or OFF. See Harmonic Analysis on page 11-2. N U C V PQ
HCL Active Trip ### High current lockout active after this trip. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
High Current Operation denied because of High Current. N U C V SWGR
CTRL
High Lockout ####A The ACR tripped with a current above the High Current Lockout setting whilst the High
Current Lockout was effective, the event shows the Value of setting at the time the event
occurred. See Protection Elements on page 8-9.
N U C V PRTN
High Lockout ON/OFF High current lockout ON/OFF. See Protection Elements on page 8-9. N U C V PRTN
High Vzps ###s Directional Blocking High Vzps alarm time in seconds. See Directional Protection on
page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
High Vzps Alarm ON/
OFF
Directional blocking high Vzps alarm ON/OFF See Directional Protection on page 8-13. N U C V PRTN
Hit and Run OFF End of Hit and Run request countdown, or timeout. See Hit and Run on page 7-2. N U C V CTRL
Hit and Run ON Start of Hit and Run period, or reason for an operation denial. See Hit and Run on
page 7-2.
N U C V CTRL
SWGR
Hit&Run Close ###s Hit and Run close time in seconds. See Hit and Run on page 7-2. N U C V CTRL
Hit&Run Not/Avail Hit and Run feature available or not available. See Hit and Run on page 7-2. N U C V CTRL
Hit&Run Trip ###s Hit and Run trip time in seconds. See Hit and Run on page 7-2. N U C V CTRL
Inrush Mult x ##### Inrush current restraint multiplier. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Inrush ON/OFF Inrush current restraint enabled or disabled. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Inrush Time ######s Inrush current restraint time in seconds. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Instant Mult x #### Instantaneous Multiplier Value. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Invalid Mapping Invalid protocol mapping. See Communications on page 10-1. N U C V PTCL
Invalid Profile Database profile was invlaid. N U C V CTRL
Invalid Switch ### Invalid switch number detected. N U C V SWGR
IP ### Internet protocol address. N U C V CTRL
Lang English (Intl) Language English (International) was selected for the display. N U C V CTRL
Lang English (USA) Language English (USA) was selected for the display. N U C V CTRL
Last Char ## Last preamble character for this communications port. N U C V PTCL
Live Block Quick key configured to control live load blocking. N U C V CTRL
LIVE if > ####V Voltage configured to live if greater than ### Volts. N U C V CTRL
PRTN
Live Load Block ON/
OFF
Live load blocking enabled or disabled. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Live Load Blocking A close request was disregarded due to a load side terminal being alive. N U C V CTRL
SWGR
Load Out The accumulated time the load side terminals have experienced an outage. N U C V PQ
Load Profile Saved database profile was loaded into current database. N U C V CTRL
Load Supply ON/OFF All configured load side Voltages are ON or OFF. N U C V NWRK
PRTN
LOCAL CONTROL ON A local operator put the controller in LOCAL mode. N U C V CTRL
LOCAL/Remote Quick key configured to change LOCAL/Remote mode. N U C V CTRL
Lockout The protection went to lockout and would not perform any more automatic recloses. N U C V SWGR
PRTN
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
M-8
Loop Auto Quick key configured to control loop automation ON/OFF. N U C V CTRL
Loop Auto Close Req Close request from loop automation. N U C V SWGR
Loop Auto Not/Avail Loop automation option was made available or not available. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Loop Auto ON/OFF Loop automation was set ON or OFF. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Loop Auto Time ###s Loop Automation action delay after supply ON-to-OFF in seconds. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Loop Auto Trip Req Trip request from loop automation. N U C V SWGR
LOP Prot Trip A protection trip was generated by Loss Of Phase protection. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
LOP/Loop Linked Loss Of Phase and Loop Automation features are linked. N U C V PRTN
LOP/Loop Unlinked Loss Of Phase and Loop Automation features are not linked. N U C V PRTN
Loss Phase Prot Alm Loss of phase protection was set to alarm.See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Loss Phase Prot ON/
OFF
Loss of phase protection was set ON or OFF. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Low Power Mode If the power supply Voltage reduces below the threshold for a certain time then the radio
supply is turned off. The switchgear would operate but would go to lockout if the capacitors
cannot be charged quickly enough.
N U C V CTRL
Low V Block OFF For Low Phase to earth Voltage, directional blocking OFF. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Low V Block ON For Low Phase to earth Voltage, directional blocking ON. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Low V Inhibit ####V The Voltage below which the Under/Over frequency protection was disabled. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Low Vnps Block ON/
OFF
For Low negative phase sequence Voltage, directional blocking was set ON or OFF. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Low Vzps Block ON/
OFF
For Low residual Voltages, directional blocking was set ON or OFF. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Manual Close Waveform capture trigger on manual close. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
Manual Trip Waveform capture trigger on manual trip. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
Master Addr ##### DNP3 protocol master address. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol
Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Max Current >= . Amps High current lockout measurement. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Maximum Time #####s Maximum time to trip in seconds. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
MDI Reset A reset was done on the Maximum Demand Indicator Meter Values. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Mech Interlocked Switchgear was mechanically interlocked. U C V SWGR
CTRL
Mech Locked Switchgear was mechanically locked U C V SWGR
Mech UnLocked Switchgear was mechanically unlocked. U C V SWGR
Mechanical Close A mechanical close occurred. N U C V SWGR
Mechanical Trip A mechanical trip occurred. N U C V SWGR
Mechanism Fail Switchgear mechanism failed to operate after being requested by the controller. N U C V SWGR
MidPoint ACR Loop automation switchgear device type was set to be a midpoint recloser. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
M-9
Min Earth Vzps #### Minimum earth residual Voltage as a percentage of phase to earth Voltage. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Min NPS Vnps ####V Minimum NPS residual Voltage. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Min SEF Vzps #### Minimum Sensitive Earth Fault Vo. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Minimum #######s Minimum Time to Trip (in seconds). See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
MM/DD Display format of Month/Day. N U C V CTRL
Mode LOCAL/Remote Port mode was made LOCAL or Remote. N U C V PTCL
Msg Attempts ## RDI Number of attempts to transmit. N U C V PTCL
N-Series Switch N-Series Switch N CTRL
N/F Cls after ####s Frequency protection close time after normal frequency reached. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
New SCEM Data New SCEM data was written to the SCEM. N U C V SWGR
No PSU Detected No power supply unit was detected. N U C V CTRL
No SWGM Detected No switchgear module detected. N U C V CTRL
Nom P-E V #####kV Nominal phase-earth Voltage. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Normal Freq Close Under/Over frequency protection, the source frequency returned to normal and a close
request was issued. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Normal Freq Close
ON/OFF
Under/Over frequency protection close was enabled or disabled. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Normal Power Mode If the power supply Voltage returns to normal then the power mode would return to normal
after 15min.
N U C V CTRL
NPS Alarm Mode ON Negative phase sequence protection set to alarm. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
NPS Dir Arm Directional blocking NPS fault armed. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
NPS Dir Block Directional blocking NPS fault blocking. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
NPS Low Vnps An NPS overcurrent trip occurred with a low Vnps condition present. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
NPS Low Vnps Arm Directional blocking low Vnps fault armed. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
NPS Low Vnps Block Directional blocking low Vnps fault blocking. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
NPS Low Vnps Fwd Directional protection low Vnps was in forward fault region. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
NPS Low Vnps Ignore Directional protection low Vnps was disabled. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
NPS Low Vnps Rev Directional protection low Vnps was in reverse fault region. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
NPS Max #### Amp Following pickup of the NPS overcurrent protection, the maximum fault current recorded
was ## Amps. This event was logged only after the current fell back below the NPS setting
current. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
NPS OFF Not/Allowed NPS protection OFF allowed or not allowed. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
NPS ON/OFF Negative phase sequence protection was set ON or OFF. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
NPS Prot Quick key configured to control negative phase sequence protection ON and OFF. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V CTRL
NPS Prot Alarm Negative phase sequence current exceeded the pickup setting for the user-specified time.
See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
NPS Prot Trip Negative phase sequence protection trip. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
M-10
NPS Threshold ##### Negative phase sequence threshold current multiplier. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
NPS Trip #### Amp Negative phase sequence trip current. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
NPS Trips Lockout # Negative phase sequence trips to lockout. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
O/F Normal ####Hz Over frequency protection's normal frequency in Hertz. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
O/F Trip at ###Hz Over frequency protection trip this frequency in Hertz. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
O/F Trip ON/OFF Over frequency protection trip was enabled or disabled. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
OCP Door Closed Operator control panel door closed. N U C V CTRL
OCP Door Opened Operator control panel door opened. N U C V CTRL
Operation Denied Attempt to perform a change was denied. N U C V SWGR
CTRL
OPS #### Number of switchgear close operations. N U C V SWGR
Options Available The panel pages displaying configurable options are accessible. N U C V CTRL
Options Not Avail The panel pages displaying configurable options are not accessible. N U C V CTRL
Out. Duration ###s Time in seconds, for terminals without Voltage to be counted as a supply outage. N U C V PQ
Outages ON/OFF The supply outage measurement feature was enabled or disabled. N U C V PQ
Outages Reset All supply outage measurement counters have been reset to zero. N U C V PQ
Over Freq Pickup The measured frequency was equal to or above the Over Frequency trip threshold. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Over Freq Reset The measured frequency fell to equal or above the Over Frequency trip threshold plus the
dead band. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Over Freq Trip The source frequency was equal to or above the Over Frequency threshold for the Trip
Delay count and a trip request was issued. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Panel Close Req Request to close made from the panel. N U C V SWGR
Panel Trip Req Request to trip made from the panel. N U C V SWGR
Parity EVEN Communications port parity bit was even. N U C V PTCL
Parity NONE Communications port parity bit was none. N U C V PTCL
Parity ODD Communications port parity bit was set to odd. N U C V PTCL
Password Changed Either the panel password or the write access password was changed. N U C V CTRL
PCOM S/N ###### PCOM Serial Number. N U C V CTRL
Phase Dir Arm Phase overcurrent pickup and trip enabled in faulted direction. The trip can take place as
normal. This can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Phase Dir Block Phase overcurrent pickup and trip blocked in faulted direction. The trip can not take place.
This can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Phase Lost #######s Phase considered lost if below a Voltage for this time. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Phase Lost @ ####V Phase considered lost below this Voltage for a set time. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Phase Low V A phase overcurrent trip occurred with a low V condition present. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
M-11
Phase Low V Arm A phase protection pickup occurred and tripping was enabled because the Voltage on all
three phases (V) was less than 500V and Low V blocking was OFF. The trip takes place as
normal. This event can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See Protection Features
on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Phase Low V Block A phase protection pickup occurred and tripping was blocked because the Voltage on all
three phases (V) was less than 500 V and Low V blocking was ON. The ACR does not trip.
This event can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Phase Low V Fwd Directional protection overcurrent pickup allowed if low Voltage and power flowing in the
forward direction. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Phase Low V Ignore Directional protection overcurrent pickup allowed if low Voltage. See Protection Features
on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Phase Low V Rev Directional protection overcurrent pickup allowed if low Voltage and power flowing in the
reverse direction. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Phase Prot Trip A protection trip was generated by the Phase overcurrent protection element. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Phase Threshold ### Protection phase current threshold multiplier. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Phase Trip #### Amp Protection phase setting current pickup level. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Phasing ABC Phase Rotation was made A,B,C. N U C V CTRL
Phasing ACB Phase Rotation was made A,C,B. N U C V CTRL
Pickup One of the protection elements picked up (phase, earth, SEF or NPS). This event was
generated by the first element to pick up, if more elements pick up subsequently then no
more pickup events are generated until all the elements have reset. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Pickup Fwd Protection overcurrent pickup in the forward direction. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Pickup Rev Protection overcurrent pickup in the reverse direction. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Plant: ######### Plant Name. N U C V CTRL
Port ############## A protocol was configured to use this RS232 port. N U C V PTCL
Post-Tx #####ms Post-Transmission time in milliseconds. N U C V PTCL
Power Down Power supply to CAPE was removed. N U C V CTRL
Power Signed Power measurement displayed in a signed format. N U C V CTRL
Power Unsigned Power measurement displayed in an unsigned format. N U C V CTRL
Power Up Power supply to CAPE was restored. N U C V CTRL
Pre-Tx #####ms Pre-Transmission time in milliseconds. N U C V PTCL
Preamble DISABLED Sending of preamble characters out of this communications port was disabled. N U C V PTCL
Preamble ENABLED Sending of preamble characters out of this communications port was enabled. N U C V PTCL
Pressure Invalid Sulphur hexaflouride (SF
6
) gas pressure invalid. N SWGR
Program Fault A program fault was detected. Contact the Manufacturer or Distributor for advice. N U C V CTRL
Prot Group Quick Key to change the protection group. N U C V CTRL
Prot Group # Req Change to active protection group requested. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Prot Grp # Active The protection group that was then active. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Prot OFF Allowed Protection can be turned OFF. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Prot OFF Not Allow Protection can not be turned OFF. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Prot Trip Waveform capture trigger on protection trip. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
M-12
Prot Trip 1/2/3/4 Protection trip sequence number. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Prot Trip Req Protection trip request. N U C V SWGR
Protection ON/OFF All the Protection features are ON or OFF. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Protocol Index # Indicates which map the protocol was to use. N U C V PTCL
PSU Unprogrammed Power supply unit was unprogrammed. N U C V CTRL
Quick Key # Changed Quick Key changed. N U C V CTRL
Radio Batt Charger Radio Supply Voltage reached the minimum Voltage. N U C V CTRL
Radio Hold #### min Amount of time radio power supply was set to hold up after the loss of auxiliary power. N U C V CTRL
Radio OFF Requested Request to remove the power supply from the radio was made. N U C V CTRL
Radio ON Requested Request to restore the power supply to the radio was made. N U C V CTRL
Radio Shutdown The radio power supply was shutdown. N U C V CTRL
Radio Supply ##V The Voltage to supply to the radio. N U C V CTRL
Radio Supply FAILED The radio power supply failed. N U C V CTRL
Radio Supply OFF The radio power supply was turned OFF. N U C V CTRL
Radio Supply ON The radio power supply was turned ON. N U C V CTRL
RDI Not/Available RS232 RDI interface driver was made available or not available. N U C V PTCL
Reclose Time #####s Time delay in seconds after a trip before reclosing. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Remote Control ON A local operator put the controller in REMOTE mode. N U C V CTRL
Repeat First ##### Number of preamble first characters to repeat on this communications port. N U C V PTCL
Reset Database Indicates that the databases have been reset and a default database used. N U C V CTRL
Reset Flags The quick key was configured to reset the trip/protection flags. N U C V CTRL
Rev AutoReclose OFF Reverse directional protection automatic reclose OFF. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Rev AutoReclose ON Reverse directional protection automatic reclose ON. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Rev AutoRestore OFF Auto Restore was turned OFF for the reverse protection group by a local or remote
operator. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Rev AutoRestore ON Auto Restore was turned ON for the reverse protection group by a local or remote
operator. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Rev Cold Load Quick key configured to operate the reverse direction cold load. N U C V CTRL
Rev Earth Blocked Directional protection blocked on reverse earth current. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Rev Earth Prot Trip Protection trip on reverse flowing earth current. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Rev NPS Blocked Directional protection blocked on reverse negative phase sequence current. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Rev NPS Prot Trip Protection trip on reverse flowing negative phase sequence current. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Rev Phase Blocked Directional protection blocked on reverse phase current. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Rev Phase Prot Trip Protection trip on reverse flowing phase current. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Rev SEF Blocked Directional protection blocked on reverse sensitive earth fault current. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Rev SEF Prot Trip Protection trip on reverse flowing sensitive earth fault current. See Protection Features
on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
M-13
Rev Sequence Adv Directional protection sequence advance in the reverse direction.See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
RTS ENABLED/
DISABLED
RS232 port Request to Send signal disabled/enabled. N U C V PTCL
Rx Bytes ########## Number of bytes received by trace utility. N U C V PTCL
Rx Count ########## For the communications trace utility, the number of byte groups received. Note this does
not necessarily relate to packets.
N U C V PTCL
Save Profile The settings of the database are being saved as a profile. N U C V CTRL
SCEM Corrupted Data in the SCEM(switch cable entry module) was corrupted. N U C V SWGR
SCEM Memory Fail SCEM(switch cable entry module) memory failure. N U C V SWGR
SCEM Type 93C46 SCEM(switch cable entry module) was type 93C46. N U SWGR
SCEM Type SCEM11 SCEM(switch cable entry module) was type 11. U SWGR
SCEM Type SCEM11P SCEM(switch cable entry module) was type 11P. N SWGR
SCEM Type SCEM9 SCEM(switch cable entry module) was type 9. U SWGR
SCEM Type Unknown SCEM(switch cable entry module) type was unknown. N U C V SWGR
SCEM Write Fail Controller was unable to write switchgear data to the SCEM(switch cable entry module). N U C V SWGR
SEF Available Sensitive earth fault protection was made available. See Protection Features on page 8-
1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Definite #####s Sensitive earth fault protection after a definite time after pickup. Also applicable to work tag
and single shot protection. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Dir Arm A SEF pickup occurred and tripping was enabled in the faulted direction. The trip could
take place as normal. This event can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Dir Block A SEF pickup occurred but tripping was blocked in the faulted direction. The ACR would
not trip. This event can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See Protection Features
on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Low Vzps An SEF overcurrent trip occurred with a low Vzps condition present. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Low Vzps Arm A SEF protection pickup occurred and tripping was enabled because the residual Voltage
(Vo) was less than the user-specified level and Low Vo blocking was OFF. The trip could
take place as normal. This event can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Low Vzps Block A SEF protection pickup occurred and tripping was blocked because the residual Voltage
(Vo) was less than the user-specified level and Low Vo blocking was ON. The ACR would
not trip. This event can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See Protection Features
on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Low Vzps Fwd A SEF pickup would occur in the forward direction if there was a low Vzps. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Low Vzps Rev A SEF pickup would occur in the reverse direction if there was a low Vzps. See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Not Available Sensitive earth fault protection was made not available. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Prot OFF Sensitive earth fault protection was set OFF. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
SEF Prot ON Sensitive earth fault protection was set ON. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
SEF Prot Trip A protection trip was generated by the SEF overcurrent protection element. See
Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SEF Trip #### Amp Sensitive earth fault trip current in Amperes. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
SEF Trips Lockout # The number of sensitive earth fault trips to lockout. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
M-14
SEF Vzps Ignore Sensitive earth fault protection ignored if Vzps was too low. See Protection Features on
page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Select/Op #####ms For DNP3, maximum time permitted in milliseconds, between receiving a select command
message and an operate command message from the master station for the control action
to be deemed Valid. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual
for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Send Class ALL For DNP3, unsolicited response class reporting. All available events, irrespective of class,
would be included in the unsolicited message. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3
Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Send Class PRIORITY For DNP3, unsolicited response class reporting. Any events available of equal or higher
priority are sent. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for
Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Send Class READY For DNP3, unsolicited response class reporting. Only the events of that class are reported.
Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced
Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Seq Comp Available Sequence components measurements are available. N U C V CTRL
Seq Comp Not Avail Sequence components measurements are not available. N U C V CTRL
Seq Reset Time ###s Auto reclose sequence reset time in seconds.See Auto Reclosing on page 8-28. N U C V PRTN
Sequence Advance With sequence control ON, this event was generated when the sequence counter
advanced due to a downstream fault which did not cause a protection trip.See Protection
Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
Sequence OFF Automatic reclose sequence control was disabled. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Sequence ON Automatic reclose sequence control was enabled. See Protection Features on page 8-1. N U C V PRTN
Sequence Reset The sequence reset timer expired. This causes the protection relay to reset to the start of
the ACR sequence for the next fault. See Protection Features on page 8-1.
N U C V PRTN
SF6 Pressure High Sulphur hexaflouride (SF6) gas pressure was high. N SWGR
SF6 Pressure Low Sulphur hexaflouride (SF6) gas pressure low. N SWGR
SF6 Pressure Normal Sulphur hexaflouride (SF6) gas pressure was normal. N SWGR
Sim Sawtooth Wave Simulated data was set to a sawtooth wave. N U C V CTRL
Sim Sine Wave ON Simulated data was set to a sine wave. N U C V CTRL
Sim Square Wave ON Simulated data was set to a square wave. N U C V CTRL
Sim Triangle Wave Simulated data was set to a triangle wave. N U C V CTRL
Simulation OFF Waveform simulation was set OFF. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V CTRL
Single Shot A trip occurred whilst in Single Shot Mode. See Single Shot Tripping on page 8-29. N U C V PRTN
Single Shot Trip ## Single shot active trip number. See Single Shot Tripping on page 8-29. N U C V PRTN
SOM Not/Available Supply outage monitoring feature was made available or not available. N U C V PQ
Source ... Load ... The operator (local or remote) changed the power flow direction. N U C V CTRL
Source Out ... The accumulated time the source side terminals have experienced an outage. N U C V PQ
Source Supply ON/
OFF
All configured source side Voltages are ON or OFF. N U C V NWRK
PRTN
SS Reset Time ####s Single shot protection reset time in seconds. N U C V PRTN
Stop bits # The number of RS232 stop bits for a communications port. N U C V PTCL
Supply Timeout ###s Time in seconds the lines must be live/dead before changing live/dead state. N U C V CTRL
PRTN
SW Inconsistent Software installed in the CAPE and the PSU are inconsistent. New code should be
installed via WSOS5's ADVC Loader.
N U C V CTRL
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
M-15
SW Load Aborted Software load was aborted. N U C V CTRL
SW Load Completed Software load was completed. N U C V CTRL
SW Load Flash Write Software load flash write in progress. N U C V CTRL
SW Load Starting Software load process was started. N U C V CTRL
SWGM
Unprogrammed
SWGM was unprogrammed. N U C V CTRL
Switch Closed On power up and switch re-connection the ACR was measured as closed. N U C V SWGR
Switch Connected Switchgear was connected to the controller. N U C V SWGR
Switch Disconnected Switchgear was disconnected from the controller. N U C V CTRL
SWGR
Switch Open On power up and switch re-connection the ACR was measured as open. N U C V SWGR
Switch S/N #### Switchgear with serial number #### was connected. N U C V SWGR
Switch Unsupported Switchgear connected was unsupported. N U C V CTRL
SWGR
System Freq 50Hz Nominal system frequency was 50Hz. N U C V CTRL
System Freq 60Hz Nominal system frequency was 60Hz. N U C V CTRL
Target ############ Communication trace target port. N U C V PTCL
Terminals A/B/C Terminal to phase designation. N U C V CTRL
Tie ACR Tie ACR type defined for loop automation. N U C V PRTN
TieRestore Bothways Loop automation Tie restore supply for loss of load or source supply. N U C V PRTN
TieRestore Oneway Loop automation Tie restore supply for loss of load supply. N U C V PRTN
Time Dly Rq ####min The amount of time, in minutes, after the last master station time synchronisation message
that the controller was set to wait before setting the 'Time Synchronisation Required'
internal indication bit (IIN1-4). This bit is sent to the master station in every controller DNP3
message. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for
Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Time Mult #### Protection curve time multiplier. Multiplies the time to trip. N U C V PRTN
Timeout #### Min Communications trace timeout in minutes. This was the maximum duration of the trace. N U C V PTCL
Trace Available Communications trace was made available. N U C V PTCL
Trace Not Available Communications trace was not made available. N U C V PTCL
Trip Angle #### Deg Directional protection trip angle(in degrees) between the Voltage and current. N U C V PRTN
Trip Coil Connected The Trip solenoid isolate switch on the operator control panel was changed to the Enable
position.
N U C V SWGR
Trip Coil Disconn The Trip solenoid isolate switch on the operator control panel was changed to the Isolate
position.
N U C V CTRL
SWGR
Trip Fwd Directional blocking would allow tripping in the forward direction. This could be applied to
phase, earth, SEF, and NPS protection.
N U C V PRTN
Trip Fwd&Rev Directional blocking would allow tripping in the either direction. This could be applied to
phase, earth, SEF, and NPS protection.
N U C V PRTN
Trip Rev Directional blocking would allow tripping in the reverse direction. This could be applied to
phase, earth, SEF, and NPS protection.
N U C V PRTN
Trips to Lockout ## Number of protection trips to lockout. N U C V PRTN
Tx Bytes ######### Communications trace count of transmitted bytes. N U C V PTCL
Tx Count ######### For the communications trace utility, the number of byte groups transmitted. Note this does
not necessarily relate to packets.
N U C V PTCL
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
M-16
Tx Delay #####ms For DNP3, additional time in milliseconds, between receiving a request and sending a
response. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for
Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
U-Series Switch U-Series Switch U CTRL
U/F Normal ###Hz Under frequency protection's normal frequency in Hertz. N U C V PRTN
U/F Trip at ###Hz Under frequency protection trip this frequency in Hertz. N U C V PRTN
U/F Trip ON/OFF Under frequency protection trip was enabled or disabled. N U C V PRTN
U/O Freq Available Under/Over frequency protection was made available. N U C V PRTN
U/O Freq Not Avail Under/Over frequency protection was not made available. N U C V PRTN
Under Freq Pickup Measured frequency was equal to or below the under frequency threshold. N U C V PRTN
Under Freq Reset The measured frequency rose to equal or above the Under Frequency trip threshold plus
the dead band.
N U C V PRTN
Under Freq Trip The measured frequency was equal to or below the Under Frequency threshold for the Trip
Delay count and a trip request was issued.
N U C V PRTN
Unsol Retries ### For DNP3, maximum number of attempts to re-transmit an unsolicited response without
getting a confirmation from the master. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol
Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Unsol Retry #####s For DNP3, unsolicited response retry delay in seconds. Please refer to the manufacturers
DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Unsolicited FORCED For DNP3, the controller would transmit unsolicited response change of state events
immediately without waiting for the 'Enable Unsolicited Messages' command from the
master station. Please refer to the manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for
Advanced Controller, Part No: ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Unsolicited OFF For DNP3, unsolicited messages from the controller are disabled. Please refer to the
manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No:
ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
Unsolicited ON For DNP3, unsolicited messages from the controller are enabled. Please refer to the
manufacturers DNP3 Protocol Technical Manaual for Advanced Controller, Part No:
ADC01-DOC-146
N U C V PTCL
C/V-Series Switch C/V-Series switchgear connected. C V CTRL
V/I a/b/c/e: THD #.#% Harmonic analysis alarm ON. Total harmonic distortion of #.#%. N U C V PQ
V/I a/b/c: THD OFF Harmonic analysis alarm OFF. Below total harmonic distortion level. N U C V PQ
Very/Ext Inv IEC255,
Definite Time,
Instantaneous Only,
Mod/Very/Ext Inv IEEE,
TCC###
Different curve selected for Earth, NPS, Phase, Work Tag or Single Shot Protection. N U C V PRTN
Vnps ##### Volt Directional blocking measure of negative phase sequence Volts. N U C V PRTN
VWE/VWVE Emulator SCEM type was C VWE/VWVE Emulator. C V SWGR
Vzps ##### Volt Directional blocking measure of zero phase sequence Voltage at the time of maximum
earth or SEF current. This event can only occur with Directional Blocking ON. See
Directional Protection on page 8-13.
N U C V PRTN
Vzps Bal DISABLED Directional blocking zero phase sequence Voltage balancing disabled. N U C V PRTN
Vzps Bal ENABLED Directional blocking zero phase sequence Voltage balancing enabled. N U C V PRTN
Wave Capt Avail Waveform capture was made available. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
Wave Capt Not Avail Waveform capture was not made available. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
Wave Capture OFF Waveform capture was set OFF. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
Wave Capture ON Waveform capture was set ON. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
M-17
Waveform Captured Waveform data was captured. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4. N U C V PQ
Waveform Playback The simulation feature was playing back the captured waveform. See Waveform Capture
on page 11-4.
N U C V CTRL
WCap Ratio ##### Waveform capture ratio indicates the percentage prior to the trigger then the percentage
after the trigger. See Waveform Capture on page 11-4.
N U C V PQ
WCap Window 0.5s Waveform capture window was set to 0.5 seconds long. See Waveform Capture on
page 11-4.
N U C V PQ
WCap Window 1s Waveform capture window was set to 1 second long. See Waveform Capture on page 11-
4.
N U C V PQ
WCap Window 2s Waveform capture window was set to 2 second long. See Waveform Capture on page 11-
4.
N U C V PQ
Work Tag A work tag protection trip, or the quick key now controls the work tag. N U C V CTRL
PRTN
Work Tag Applied The Work Tag was applied. N U C V CTRL
PRTN
SWGR
Work Tag OFF The Work Tag was turned OFF. N U C V PRTN
CTRL
Wrong Mode When the switch was in a different mode (LOCAL, Remote or Work Tag Applied) to the
device which attempted the close.
N U C V SWGR
CTRL
WSOS5 Close Req WSOS5 initiated the close request. N U C V SWGR
WSOS5 Trip Req WSOS5 initiated the trip request. N U C V SWGR
Event Text Explanation Switchgear Category
Advanced Controller Operations Manual
M-18
Index-1
A
Accuracy ..........................................................3-1
Additional Time .................................................8-4
ALT .................................................................5-2
Angle of door opening .......................................3-1
Angle of hatch opening .....................................3-1
Apparent Power Accuracy .................................3-3
Apparent Power Range .....................................3-3
Auto Reclose ..................................................8-17
Auto Reclose ON/OFF ...................................... I-2
Auto Restore ..................................................8-17
Automatic Protection Group Selection ................8-8
Automatic Protection Group selection ................8-8
Aux supply ....................................................... I-3
OK ...........................................................15-5
Auxiliary power
Source ........................................................4-1
auxiliary supply .................................................4-1
auxiliary supply rating .......................................3-1
Auxiliary supply voltage .....................................3-1
auxiliary voltage ................................................1-1
B
basic display unit ..............................................4-2
batteries ...........................................................4-1
Battery .............................................................3-1
Supply OK .................................................15-5
Battery heater element life .................................3-2
Battery heater power .........................................3-2
Battery High Voltage .........................................3-2
Battery Low Voltage ..........................................3-2
Battery recharge time ........................................3-2
Battery replacement interval ..............................3-2
BDU ........................................................ 1-2, 4-2
C
CAPE ..............................................................4-1
CAPM Electronics OK .....................................15-5
caution symbol .................................................1-2
changing settings ..............................................5-3
Close key .........................................................5-1
CLP .................................................................8-5
Cold Load
Multiplier .....................................................8-6
OFF ..........................................................K-2
ON ............................................................K-2
Pickup ........................................................8-5
Quick Key ....................................................8-7
Time .................................................. 8-6, K-2
Cold Load Pickup Status ...................................8-7
Communication Display Group ........................10-3
Communication Loop-back ..............................10-7
communication ports .......................................10-1
Communication Trace .....................................10-7
Communications Capture ................................10-8
Communications Trace Settings ......................10-8
condensation ....................................................4-1
Configurable IOEX ..........................................15-5
Configurable IOEX Tool ..................................15-5
Configurable Quick Key ....................................5-1
Contact life
Greater than 20% on all phases .....................15-5
Continuous secondary current ...........................3-2
Control and protection enclosure .......................4-1
Control cable
Service drawing ........................................... D-2
control cable length ..........................................3-1
Control cubicle ................................................ D-1
Construction .................................................4-1
Control cable service drawing ......................... D-2
Schematics ................................................. D-1
controller mode ................................................7-1
Controller Version .............................................2-1
CT ...................................................................4-2
Cubicle material ................................................3-1
Cubicle shell sealing .........................................3-1
cubicle vents ....................................................4-1
Current Operated Protection Elements .............8-10
Custom Menu key .............................................5-1
Customisation ................................................14-1
CVT .................................................................4-2
D
Dead Lockout .................................................8-29
Definite Time ....................................................8-3
Definition of Local / Remote user .......................7-1
demand records ...............................................9-1
Determination of Harmonics Alarms .................11-3
Determination of Supply Outage ......................11-1
Directional blocking ........................................11-1
Status .......................................................8-21
Directional Protection ......................................8-13
Display ............................................................5-1
Display Groups .................................................5-2
Dual events ......................................................6-3
E
E/F OFF Allowed/Not Allowed ........................... I-5
Earth Current Accuracy .....................................3-3
Earth Current Range .........................................3-3
Earth Fault (EF) Elements ...............................8-11
Earth protection trip number 1,2,3,4 (AJ) K-6, K-7,
K-8
Earth/SEF Directional protection ......................8-20
Earthing ...........................................................3-2
Electronic enclosure sealing ..............................3-1
Enable/Disable Close switch .............................5-1
Enable/Disable Trip switch ................................5-1
Enter key .........................................................5-1
Ethernet .........................................................10-3
event filtering ....................................................6-4
Event Log ........................................................6-1
Extremely Inverse .....................................E-1, F-1
F
Fail to Operate Under Protection .....................8-27
Fault
Flags ........................................................8-31
Fault flags
Resetting ...................................................8-31
Feature Selection ...........................................14-1
INDEX
Operations Manual
Index-2
field excitation ................................................ 15-1
Frequency Measurement ................................ 8-23
G
Gas
Pressure normal ......................................... 15-5
H
Harmonic Analysis .......................................... 11-2
High Current Lockout ....................................... K-2
Historical Data Logging of Harmonics .............. 11-3
Hit and Run ...................................................... 7-2
HOT LINE ........................................................ 5-1
Hot Line Tag .................................................... 5-1
Humidity .......................................................... 3-1
I
IEC255
Inverse Time Protection tables .........................E-1
IEEE
Inverse Time Protection tables .........................F-1
Input Output Expander .................................... 15-1
Input Output Expander (IOEX) Card ................ 15-1
Inputs ............................................................ 15-3
Inrush
ON/OFF ..................................................... K-2
Restraint ................................................... 8-32
Time .......................................................... K-2
Instantaneous .................................................. 8-3
Only ......................................... K-6, K-7, K-8
Instantaneous Multiplier .................................... 8-5
Inverse ............................................................E-1
Inverse Current/Time ........................................ 8-3
Inverse Time protection curves ......................... G-1
IOEX
Card ......................................................... 15-1
Status ..........................................................I-6
IOEX Status Page .......................................... 15-3
IOEX system healthy indicator ......................... 15-5
IOEX2 ........................................................... 15-1
IOEX2 Installation ........................................... 15-2
L
LEFT scroll key ................................................ 5-2
Live Load Blocking ......................................... 8-29
Live Load blocking ....................................8-5, K-1
Live Terminal Threshold ................................... 8-5
Live Terminal Threshold Voltage range .............. 3-2
Live/Dead indication ..........................................I-4
Local
Control
ON I-2
Mode .......................................................... 7-1
Local Mode ...................................................... 7-1
local user ......................................................... 7-1
LOCAL/REMOTE ............................................. 5-1
Local/Remote
Mode .......................................................... 7-1
Lockout ................................................... 8-29, I-2
Logging of Harmonics Alarms ......................... 11-3
low power mode ............................................... 4-1
M
Maintenance .................................................... 3-1
maintenance port ............................................. 4-3
Maximum Time ................................................ 8-4
Measurement Filter Time Constant .................... 3-3
Measurement Update Rate ............................... 3-3
measurements ................................................. 9-1
Mechanism OK. ............................................. 15-5
MENU scroll key .............................................. 5-2
Minimum Time ................................................. 8-4
Moderately Inverse ........................................... F-1
N
navigation symbol ............................................ 1-2
navigation within groups ................................... 5-4
Non-standard Inverse Time protection curves ... G-1
Normal Frequency Close ................................ 8-24
note symbol ..................................................... 1-2
O
OCI ................................................................. 5-1
OCP ................................................................ 4-1
Operating temperature ...................................... 3-1
Operational Cold Load Multiplier ........................ 8-6
Operational Cold Load Time ............................. 8-6
Operator Control Panel ..................................... 4-1
operator control panel ....................................... 5-1
operator interface ............................................. 4-2
Operator settings ........................................ I-2, I-3
Optically isolated input contacts ...................... 15-1
Outputs ......................................................... 15-4
Overcurrent Protection Element Pickup and Reset 8-2
Overcurrent Protection Element Time / Current Charac-
teristics ............................................................ 8-3
P
pages .............................................................. 5-2
Parts and tools ................................................ C-1
password ......................................................... 5-3
Pause .............................................................. 8-2
Phase
Directional protection ................................... 8-19
Prot trip number 1,2,3,4 (AJ) ........ K-5, K-6, K-7
Voltage ........................................................I-4
Phase Current Accuracy ................................... 3-3
Phase Current Range ....................................... 3-3
Phase Overcurrent (OC) Elements .................. 8-10
Pickup ............................................................. 8-2
Port Details .................................................... 10-1
Power Factor Accuracy ..................................... 3-3
Power Factor Resolution ................................... 3-3
Power Flow direction ................................. 8-8, I-4
Power Quality Tool Kit .................................... 11-1
Power supply unit ............................................. 4-1
Press to Talk (PTT) ........................................ 10-3
Prot OFF control ...............................................I-5
Protection .................................................8-1, 9-1
Auto ........................................................... 8-8
Options ................................................. I-5, I-6
Pages ........................................................ K-1
Setting 1 (AJ) ............................................ K-1
Setting 2 (A J) ........................................... K-1
Setting 3 (AJ) ............................................ K-1
Setting 4 (AJ) ............................................ K-2
Setting 5 (AJ) ............................................ K-2
protection elements .......................................... 8-1
Protection Groups ............................................ 8-2
Protection settings ............................................ 5-4
PSU .........................................................1-2, 4-1
Index-3
PSU module .....................................................4-1
Q
Quick Key ........................................................5-4
R
radiation ...........................................................3-1
Radio and IOEX ............................................... I-4
Radio/Modem
Power ......................................................... I-4
Radio/Modem Interface .....................................3-2
Radio/Modem Power Shutdown Time ................3-2
Radio/Modem Power Supply Voltage .................3-2
Ratio ................................................................3-1
Reactive Power Accuracy ..................................3-3
Reactive Power Resolution ...............................3-3
Real Power Accuracy ........................................3-3
re-configuring the Quick Keys ............................5-4
Related Documents ..........................................2-2
Remote
Mode ..........................................................7-1
Remote Control ON .......................................... I-2
Remote Mode ...................................................7-1
remote user ......................................................7-1
Required auxiliary supply rating .........................3-2
Reset ...............................................................8-2
Resetting
Fault flags ..................................................8-31
Trip flags ...................................................8-31
RIGHT scroll key ..............................................5-2
RS-232 Configuration Settings ........................10-4
RS232 ports ...................................................10-1
RS485 port .....................................................10-2
S
SCEM Data ....................................................15-5
sealing .............................................................3-1
Sealing and condensation .................................4-1
Secondary Injection Test Set ...........................15-6
SEF .................................................................8-5
Counter .....................................................8-29
Residual Voltage Indication ...........................8-20
SEF Residual Voltage Alarm ...........................8-20
SELECT key ....................................................5-2
Select key ........................................................5-3
Selection rules ..................................................8-8
Sensitive Earth Fault .........................................8-5
Sequence
Control .......................................................K-1
Coordination ..............................................8-29
Sequence control ............................................8-29
Sequence Reset ................................... 8-17, 8-29
setting change events .......................................6-2
settings ............................................................5-3
Short time current recovery time ........................3-2
Short time secondary current .............................3-2
Shutdown time increment ..................................3-2
Single Shot
Active ......................................................... I-2
Single Shot Mode ...........................................8-30
Single Shot Timer ...........................................8-30
Software Capability ...........................................2-1
Software Identification .......................................2-1
Software Version ..............................................2-1
software version ...............................................2-1
stainless steel ..................................................3-1
Standard Event Types .................................... M-1
status ...............................................................5-3
sub-pages ........................................................5-2
Supply Outage Monitoring ...............................11-1
Supply Outages
Display ........................................................ J-2
Supply Timeout ................................................ I-4
SWGM submodule ...........................................4-2
Switchgear
Status ......................................................... I-3
Terminal designation/rotation ........................... I-4
Type and ratings ........................................... I-5
Wear/general details ...................................... I-5
System
Healthy indicator .........................................15-5
Status pages ........................................ H-1, I-1
T
Test and Training Set ....................................... C-1
Threshold Multiplier ..........................................8-4
Time Current Characteristic Modifiers ................8-3
Time Multiplier ........................ 8-4, K-6, K-7, K-8
Timing .............................................................8-2
Trip flags ........................................................8-31
Resetting ...................................................8-31
Trip key ............................................................5-1
Trips to Lockout ..............................................8-16
U
Under / Over Frequency display ....................... K-4
Under Frequency Protection ............................8-23
Under/Over Frequency Tripping .......................8-24
Unsigned Power Factor .....................................3-3
V
V23 FSK ........................................................10-2
vertical separation ............................................3-1
Very Inverse .............................................E-1, F-1
Voltage Accuracy .............................................3-2
Voltage free output contacts ............................15-1
Voltage Resolution ...........................................3-2
VZPS Balancing .............................................8-18
W
warning symbol ................................................1-2
Wind loading ....................................................3-1
Windows Switchgear Operating System (WSOS) 13-1
Windows Switchgear Operator System ..............5-3
Work Tag ........................................ 7-3, 15-4, I-3
Work Tag protection settings .............................7-3
Work Tag Tripping ..........................................8-30
WSOS .............................................................5-4
WSOS Interface ...............................................4-3
WSOS5 .........................................................13-1
WSOS5 Controlled Mode Operation ................10-9
WSOS5 Protection Settings screens ................8-27
As standards, specifications and designs change from time to
time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this
publication.
Corporate office &
factory
35-37 South Street
Lytton, 4178
Queensland
Australia
Tel: +61 7 3249 5444
Fax: +61 7 3249 5888
e-mail: [email protected]
http://www.nulec.com.au
Nu-Lec Industries USA office
1252 Old Alpharetta Road
Alpharetta, Georgia
30005-3986
United States of America
Tel: +1770 521 2000
Fax: +1770 521 2100
e-mail: [email protected]
http://www.nulec.com
09/2005
A
D
C
-
1
0
0
9
-
N
I